IQANdesign

IQANdesignVersion 2.50 User manual IQANdesign User manual License Software User Agreement Important-please read carefully before use of the Software. Your use of this computer program is subject to the terms and conditions of the following Software User Agreement. If you do not wish to accept these terms and conditions, do not install or use this Software and please return this Software to the place you obtained it for refund. License agreement, restrictions on use Use This is a license agreement between you (the entity to whom this software is provided) and Parker Hannifin Corporation (“Licensor”). This agreement permits you to Use each program furnished directly or indirectly from Licensor, either by Licensor or its authorized distributors (“Distributors”) including any Copies thereof and any supporting materials and any related updated programs or program portions (“Software”). The term “Copies” means any duplications, reproductions, transcriptions of any Software, either in whole or in part and by any means whatsoever including electronic, mechanical, and manual processes. The term “Use” means copying any portion of any Software or using any Software, but only in connection with the analysis, specification, use, installation, repair, sale of products through Licensor or its Distributors. Restrictions You will have a non-transferable and non-exclusive right to Use the Software. You may make Copies of the Software provided that any such Copies are made solely for your Use or for archival or back-up and no other purposes. No right to Use, print, copy of display the Software, in whole or in part, is granted except as expressly provided in this agreement. You will not reverse engineer, disassemble or decompile the Software. You agree to reproduce and include any and all copyright notices, software user agreements notices and terms and conditions, trademarks and other legends in and on every Copy of the Software. Ownership Title and ownership of the Software and Copies thereof shall at all times exclusively remain in Licensor or its designee. You will obtain no greater right in and to the Software than a right in the nature of the License limited to the Use of any such Software and subject to compliance with all of the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement. To the extent that the Software becomes deliverable under any U.S. Government funded prime contract or subcontract, (i) you acknowledge and agree that this Software represent “commercial computer software” as defined in the DoD Federal Acquisitions Regulation Supplement (DFARS) § 525.227-7014 (a)(I), and (ii) the Government’s right in connection with the Software will be limited in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement consistent with the policies stated in DFARS Subpart 227.7202. Modifications Modifications or enhancements made by Licensor to any Software from time to time may be made available to you at the sole option of Licensor or its Distributors. If the Software is modified by you or merged into other program materials processed or used by solely by you, IQANdesign User manual Licensor and its Distributors shall not have any liability or incur any expense or be affected in any way by any such modification or merger, even if such modification or merger results in the formation of an updated or new work. Rather, such Software, in its modified or merged form, shall continue at all times to be the sole and exclusive property of Licensor and shall be subject to all provisions of this Agreement. Limited warranty Limited warranty Licensor warrants that (a) the original Software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt; and (b) any hardware accompanying the Software will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from receipt date. Any implied warranties on the Software and the hardware are limited only to ninety (90) days and one (1) year respectively. The limited warranty applies to the original Software and not to any copies made by you or others from the original Software or copies thereof. Customer remedies Licensor’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at Licensor’s option either (a) return of the price paid or (b) repair or replacement of the Software or hardware that does not meet Licensor’s limited warranty and that is returned to the Licensor with a copy of your receipt. The limited warranty is void if failure of the Software or hardware has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication of the original hardware and Software only and in no case shall the limited warranty apply to any copies of the original Software. Any replacement Software shall be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or for thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. No other warranties Licensor disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the Software, any accompanying written material, any accompanying hardware, and any services for any of the foregoing. No other liability In no event will Licensor or its agents or suppliers or Distributors be liable for any direct or indirect damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for negligence, strict liability, breach of contract, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, or pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of, or inability to use or failure to deliver the Software or any defects therein, even if the Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In no event shall the aggregate liability of Licensor, its agents, suppliers and distributors exceed an amount equal to the price paid for the Software license. ATTENTION If you do not accept the terms and conditions of this license do not install or use the Software. IQANdesign User manual Contents 1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Modules, channels and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Function groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Orderliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Import/export functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Enable/disable functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Display pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Measure groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Adjust groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Application check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Application statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Memory handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Application passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Application id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Application properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Application safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Risk assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 File operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Edit operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Application manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Measure groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adjust groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Display pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2 IQANdesign User manual 4 Contents Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Hiding or resizing the application manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Property inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Changing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Changing a property on multiple components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Drag and drop copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Go to component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Automatic property values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Property inspector options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 IQ panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Component navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Application documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Document sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Save document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Print document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Refresh document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 File compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Compare files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Compare with a text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Dialog options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Show again options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 IQAN Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Check for updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 3 Function groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Function group input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Function group output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Calculation order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 To rearrange the calculation order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Locked function groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Edit and view lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Edit lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Set function group password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Unlock a function group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Safety related function groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Mark as safety related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Export/Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 IQANdesign User manual 5 Contents Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Function group options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Freeze positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Object groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Object group types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Object group method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Single object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Dual object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Vector object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Multi vector object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Math object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Naming channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Value and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Voltage in - VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Digital in - DIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Frequency in - FIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Directional frequency in - DFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Directional analog channel - DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Current out - COUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 PWM out - PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Digital out - DOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Servo out - SOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Calculation channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Mathematical channels - MAC and DMAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Internal digital channel - IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 PID regulator - PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Integrating limiting channel - ILC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Event counter - ECNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Memorizing channel - MEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Slope/Filter channel - SFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Butterworth filter channel - BFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Lookup table channel - LTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Miscellaneous channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Function group input - FGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Function parameter - FP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 State machine channel - SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 State parameter - SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 5 IQANdesign User manual 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .Application input . . . . . . . . 160 Generic frame out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VDIN . . . . . .GFOUT . . 147 CAN channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 APPOUT . . . . . . . . . . .TMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Suspect parameter number . 175 MC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . .PIN . . . . 178 XS2 . . .PCC . . . . . . 132 Timer . . . . . . . 175 MC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TSC1 . . . 154 Parameter group out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Compare channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Conditional message . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Interactive message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SYSOUT . . . . . . . 131 System output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Module address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Master modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Application output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Analog/digital compare channel . .PGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Generic frame in . . . . . 146 Virtual digital in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Text formatting channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TP . . . 130 System input . . . . .SMSOUT . . . . . . . 179 IQANdesign User manual 7 . . . . . . .POUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 TSC1 engine control . . . .MDGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AAC . . 164 Analog/analog compare channel . . . . . . . . . 172 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 SMS out . . . . . . . . . 178 Lx . . . . . . . . . . 137 Text parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 MDL/MDL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CAN messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 MD3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 PIN code channel . . 164 Digital/digital compare channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 6 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Module diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Diagnostic message 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Parameter out . . .DM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 APPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 LC5 . . . . . . . . 142 SMS in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Parameter group in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 XA2 . . . . . . . 162 Safety channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IMSG . . . . . . .SMSIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Interface channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Parameter input . . . .SYSIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Auto scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Bus index . .Contents XC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 J1939 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Scroll in X and Y directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ICP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Measure . . . . . . 188 Moving channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Position the cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Add modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Zoom in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Measure in IQANdesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 8 IQANdesign User manual 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Zoom out . . . . . . . 185 Add buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 7 Measure groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Generic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Move a curve along the Y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Locking the cursors . . 189 Measure groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Graph options . . . . . . 184 How to connect a system in IQANdesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Application default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Adjust groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Generic . . . . . 197 Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 XR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Measure files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 J1939 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Clear values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Add a new measure group . . . 188 Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Measure in other views . . . . . 192 Start/Stop measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Adjustable channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Add channels to a module . . . . . . . . . 179 XT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Measure item properties . . . . . 186 Block diagram . . . . . . . 185 Sharing a bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Hour counter log item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Display pages in IQANdesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Language properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Properties for all display pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Display page properties . . . 204 Get application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Counter log item . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Statistics log . . . . . . . 218 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Add a statistics log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Display pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Protect an adjust group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Min and max log items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Measure . . . . . . . . 212 System log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 How to design a display page in IQANdesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Event log . . . . . . . 209 9 Logs . . . 202 Stored channel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Properties . . . . . . . . . . 216 Event log item . . . . 223 Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Managing application languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Adding multi-language texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Add an event log . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Send application . . . . . . . . . . 224 Send application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Adjust items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Properties . . . . . . . . . 207 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 10 11 IQANdesign User manual 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Adjust groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Font selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Value log item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Reference channel . . . 208 Add a new adjust group . . . . . . . 213 System events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Add images to an image group . 246 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Design tools . . . . . . . . 240 Image gauge control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQAN-MDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Display controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 To change the start up image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Button positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Slider control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Vertical and Horizontal alignment tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Adding password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Application password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Value control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 IQANdesign User manual 10 . . . . . 253 Images and Image groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Text control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents System dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Safe password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Date restrictions . . . . . . 241 Image control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Bar graph control . . 265 Safe passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Grid . . . . . . . . . . 254 Images included in the IQANdesign installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Image bar graph control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Orthogonal alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Assigning images to controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Password types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Line control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Add password . . . . . . . . . . 257 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Horizontal and vertical distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Create an image group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 System colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Snap to other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Button positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Start up image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 System info . . . . 261 Change or remove a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 12 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQAN-MD3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Safe passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Display buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Password database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Component properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Choosing a modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 IQANsimulate controlling IQANdesign . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Application security . . . . . . 281 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 System communication . . . . . . . 280 Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 IQANdesign controlling IQANsimulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Get application . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Security properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 13 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Calculation order . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Superuser . . . . . . . . . . 286 Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Architecture . . . 292 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 IQANsimulate synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Set date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Connect via modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Send application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Create a safe password . . . . 272 Administrator users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Add a user . 289 Coding guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 General safety principles . . . . . 267 Access levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 14 15 IQANdesign User manual 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 General guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Naming conventions . . . . . . 280 Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Add . 294 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Add an access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 One control station at a time . . . . . 298 Safety related applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 16 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Application defaults on parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Present inputs on the master display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 State parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Error detection action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents De-energization . . . . . . 330 State machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Diesel engine CAN communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Sending a text message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Interfaces to non safety related functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Protect parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Adding measure groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Input integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Safety related function groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Controlling a boom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 IQANdesign User manual 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Using states on a boom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Start and restart conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . choose the one that suits you the best. connecting channels and creating functions you will soon create the application file that will be downloaded into the master. buses. By adding modules. inputs. addresses. You can do it either way. In IQANdesign there are no rules on what to do first.1 Application An IQAN system consists of one master module. IQANdesign User manual 13 . You can start to develop the functionality by creating channels and conditions or if you prefer. various expansion modules and an application file. outputs and internal channels – everything that plays a role in controlling a machine. The application file consists of information about the system’s modules. you can add the modules you expect to use and then connect the channels. IQANdesign is the design tool that will be used to create an application file. channels and functions An application file contains information about the system’s modules. SAE J1939 or Generic CAN. output or an internal channel. addresses. The master is the central unit in the system. Functions A function is created by objects that are grouped in object groups that are typical for a particular channel. delays. The modules are designed with different mixes of inputs and outputs to suit different machine applications. The internal channels are not physical channels like the inputs and output. that are handled and calculated by the master. It also contains all non-module specific channels such as PID regulators. All communication is routed through the master. alarms. The master communicates with modules via CAN-buses (Controller Area Network) either ICP (IQAN CAN Protocol).Modules. There are five types of objects: single. The properties are unique for each channel type. IQANdesign User manual 14 . buses. They are only handled by the master internally. For further information about different module types see information in the respective data sheets and instruction books. if you want to control the boom. dual. You use IQANdesign to create all of that information. counters and math channels. Channels A channel can either be an input. scaling. how the channels can influence on each other. For example. You put something in and get something out. start a timer or control the speed on a diesel engine. Most of the internal channels have both properties and one or many functions. count events. What you get out depends on what type of object you have selected and the condition you have entered. etc. Input channel Input channel Properties Internal channel Internal channel Properties Functions Output channel Properties A simple illustration. All calculations take place in the master and there can only be one master in an IQAN application. external channels (physical inputs and outputs) and so called “internal channels”. All channels have different properties such as name. Modules The type of master and expansion modules you need is decided based on the functionality you want in your “machine”. multi vector and math. The internal channels are used to create functionality. An object is like a “black box”. vector. filter. channels and functions 1 Application Modules. Instead of having all of the channels visible in the same function group editor. it will be easier to understand the application. Enable/disable functionality It is possible to disable function groups. There are three general purposes for using function groups in an IQANdesign application. that group will not be calculated by the master. For more information see section Export/Import on page 69. It is possible to write comments to the function group as a description. function groups. Orderliness By splitting the application into smaller parts. You could build up a library with function groups in a single master application file. IQANdesign User manual 15 . If a function group is disabled. This could be useful if you want your application to contain functionality for several machines that will not be used by every machine. there can be a function group for crane control another for diesel engine etc. Import/export functionality A function group can be exported to or imported from another application.Function groups 1 Application Function groups Channels can be grouped in something called function groups. It can be very useful to reuse parts from other applications. By using several dedicated display pages it is possible to show enough of the correct information in different situations. All of the below described components are part of and stored in your application file.bmp) or JPEG (. The difference between this display and a “traditional” operator or driver environment is that all of the information does not necessarily need to always be shown. IQANdesign User manual 16 . Image formats can be either bitmap (. For example. Adjust groups Create adjust groups with adjustable channels to let the operator. service personnel and other users necessary information in different situations. IQANdesign also includes tools and components to create the graphical user interface for the master display used in the cabin. we have only talked about machine functionality. Many of the different control types use images that you import to your application. IQANdesign supports Unicode for all texts in an application. Display pages Display pages are used to design the graphical user interface for the master display that gives the operator. That can be achieved by adding the sensor input channel to an adjust group and make that adjust group accessible for the user. Display pages consists of display page controls.jpg). such as IQAN-MDL or IQAN-MD3 for instance.Graphical user interface 1 Application Graphical user interface So far. when a sensor is replaced in a machine. it often needs to be calibrated. service personnel or other users measure and diagnose the application. This will for instance let the user measure sensor values to check that everything is connected and working as expected. such as texts. NOTE Display pages can only be used in applications where a display module exists. Measure groups Create measure groups with selected channels to let the operator. gauges and bar graphs. service personnel or other users adjust and tune the application. images. Hints are not necessarily dangerous to your application. undefined properties or invalid values. IQANdesign User manual 17 . Select a list item to get a more detailed description about that specific error. You can quickly go to the problem component by double-clicking its item in the list. It can still be faulty of course.Application check 1 Application Application check An application can contain errors. Warnings and hints will not stop a master module from running the application. warning and hint. IQANdesign will then check the application for errors and present a list with the result in a dialog box. such as missing channels. together with the affected component and property when applicable. The description is displayed in the top panel. Applications that contain errors can not be downloaded to a master module. IQANdesign will also check for warnings and hints. but this has to be tested by you. IQANdesign will find the component and select it for you in the editor. but can be worth looking at anyway. Warnings are not errors. Application check dialog box. warning or hint. To find these errors. You can sort the list with errors. The master will not run an application with errors. warnings and hints the way you want by clicking in the column header. next to IQ. The dialog box presents a short description of each error. but they are potential safety problems or could cause problems of some kind. for example by using IQANsimulate to check all your application functions. select Application > Check Application. the item will now disappear from the list.Application check 1 Application Fix the problem and click Refresh to check the application again. Therefore. There are also some warnings that are propagated to errors when they occur in safety related function groups. Select Tools > Options and switch to the Application check tab in the dialog box that pops up. one for hints and one for warnings. For a list of what is checked. IQANdesign User manual 18 . Some channels or mathematical operations are not allowed in safety related function groups and will generate errors if used. Safety related function groups Function groups can be marked safety related. you can define which warnings and hints you want reported by the application check. Uncheck the ones that you don’t want reported by application check. Such function groups will be checked more rigorously during the application check. see section Safety related function groups on page 67. If you’ve fixed it correctly. see section Safety related function groups on page 67. Options All warnings and hints may not be important in your application. There are two list boxes. Each box lists all possible hints and warnings with a check box to the left. IQANdesign User manual 19 . Please use IQANsimulate to check that your application works in a proper way before you download it to the master. This can only be done if there are no errors. Send application Before your application is downloaded to the master. does not guarantee that the application is working as expected. Click Send to send the application to a connected master module. warnings or hints. ATTENTION An empty application checklist with no errors.Application check 1 Application Application check options. the application will automatically be checked for errors. Under the application node you can see the stored size of all images in your application. Each separate language size is listed under the languages node.Application statistics 1 Application Application statistics To get information about your application size. which is often a major part of the complete size. see section Non-volatile memory on page 22. select Application > Statistics. Total stored size Specifies the amount of non-volatile memory needed to store your application in the master module. Total stored size is the sum of application and languages. IQANdesign User manual 20 . Application statistics. A dialog box with statistics such as component counts and application file size is shown. Application and languages are presented as two separate nodes since they are sent as separate “files” when downloading to a master module. For more information on stored size. Component count Specifies the total number of components in your application. This can be very helpful when you need to find where your application consumes the most volatile memory. Other Lists other information about your application. Application id is a unique identifier for this application. logs and display pages are listed separately under this node. including the ones that have been deleted. see section Application id on page 25 for more information.Application statistics 1 Application Estimated memory utilization Specifies the estimated amount of volatile memory (RAM) needed to run your application in the master module. see section Volatile memory on page 22. If you run out of volatile memory the master module will immediately stop program execution and enter its safe mode. ATTENTION These numbers are only estimations. Property count Specifies the total number of properties in your application. They may be different in a real master module. Different property types are listed separately under this node. such as function groups. ATTENTION It is important that you optimize your application’s memory usage for both memory types so that you don’t exceed the limits set by the master module. volatile and non-volatile memory. Memory handling This section discusses all the things you need to know about memory handling issues. Different component types are listed separately under this node. These two memory types are used for different purposes and have different properties. Memory types There are two types of memory in a master module. version and size of the operating system used for this application. IQANdesign User manual 21 . It will help you to optimize the size of your application and to make sure that you don’t run out of memory. almost all memory allocation is done at application startup. Next component id tells you roughly how many components you have added to this application ever. In practice. The Operating system values presents type. Some major parts of your application. To measure exact memory utilization. and therefor the application should not start at all if you use to much volatile memory. under Estimated memory utilization. see section System output . by using a system output channel. You have to use less components in your application. Two of these can be monitored by you. Non-volatile memory This memory type is the equivalent of the hard disk in your PC. Components with many properties use more memory than those with fewer properties. Reducing the number of images and languages will not help though.SYSOUT on page 132. therefor you should also monitor memory utilization on a real master module in run-time. This memory is used to store many different things. For example. for example. the operating system. display page controls. application size and log memory utilization. etc. since these are stored in non-volatile memory. settings. users and logs. because of the same reason. you should try to keep memory utilization below 80%. the complete application. that is. but will give you a good indication. Application size on the other hand can be estimated by IQANdesign. objects. but is not as efficient as volatile memory. parts of your application. but is very fast and efficient. This is hard to do at design-time. If your memory utilization is getting close to 100% there are some important things to know about how to decrease it.Application statistics 1 Application Volatile memory This memory type is also known as RAM. Shorter texts will not help either. Log memory is monitored in the same way as volatile memory. a current output (especially one with many modes) uses more memory than a digital input. calculation results or communication buffers. Use the Property Inspector to count properties. less channels. IQANdesign tries to estimate how much volatile memory will be consumed in the Application statistics dialog box. see section System output . such as. NOTE You should measure memory utilization on a real master module.SYSOUT on page 132. You can see application size in the Application statistics dialog IQANdesign User manual 22 . at design-time. IQANsimulate can not calculate exact memory utilization. This memory is used in run-time to store. If you’re above 80% there may be problems with PC communication. NOTE As a rule of thumb. Volatile memory does not keep its content during power-off. Non-volatile memory keeps its content during power-off. When talking about IQAN modules it is sometimes referred to as Flash. you could consider downloading only a subset of the languages. such as asian languages. a warning will be generated in the application check.Application statistics 1 Application box. IQANdesign User manual 23 . Different applications get different compression ratios. you should concentrate on number of languages and text lengths. If your application is too big. If you are using languages that requires extra fonts. since this is one of the most memory consuming components. Memory sizes Different master modules contain different amounts of memory. If this is not enough. Second. see section Master modules on page 174. For a complete list. under Total stored size. If your application exceeds maximum stored size (or maximum compressed size). you should first try to reduce image count and/ or size. see section Application check on page 17. Applications are compressed when they are sent from the PC to the master and there is a limit for the compressed size also. you must decrease your number of components. see table below. Normally it is the maximum application size that will be the limit though. This number must not exceed the limit for the master module you are using. There is no guarantee that your application will fit even if it is smaller than maximum application size. both volatile and non-volatile. one for full access and one for limited access. see section Application password on page 261. For more information on application passwords. select Application > Passwords. IQANdesign User manual 24 .Application passwords 1 Application Application passwords An application can be protected by passwords. To set the passwords. It will check that the application and settings file has the same id. If you change the application id and send the application to a master module that contains the same application with the old id.Application id 1 Application Application id The application id is created automatically when you create a new application. and it is used to identify your application in certain situations. the application id has to match the id stored in the Excel file. new logs will be created and the settings file will be erased. when it receives a new application or settings file. It is a globally unique identifier. The most important use of application id is for the master module. This can be useful when you are creating a new application for a machine type that resembles an existing application. IQANdesign User manual 25 . For example. If not. ATTENTION Do not change the application id unless you really want to create a new application for another machine type. Change application id warning. use Application > Change Id. when importing languages from an Excel file. the settings file will be replaced by the application default settings. If you want to change the application id for some reason. Enter a description for this application. Select Application at the top of the application manager. Enter a comment. Information on who changed this application the last time and when. Properties Name Description Version Comment Author Last change Enter a name for this application. Enter the name of this application’s author. IQANdesign User manual 26 . version and author.04” or “Beta 1”. Enter an application version. such as name. for example “3.Application properties 1 Application Application properties There are some properties that are applicable to the application. Application properties are now available in the property inspector. certain safety functions may need to be implemented on a controller specifically designed for functional safety. activities related to the updating of the application logic or its parameters must also be considered. To prevent unauthorized personnel from getting. see section Security on page 260.When introducing a programmable controller on the machine. it is possible to protect the application with application passwords. This includes both selection of components and design of the application logic. the machine’s engine must be switched off. The machine must be positioned in a way so that it can not start moving. It is important that you read this chapter before you start creating applications for machines. Sending data to the IQAN system When downloading data to the IQAN system. IQANdesign is a tool that is suitable for implementation of safety related application software. we recommend using a standard such as EN ISO 14121-1. When the risk assessment shows that a function has an impact on safety. The result of the risk assessment will influence the way that functions are implemented in IQAN. the driver must acknowledge the download request on the master display. For guidance on risk assessment. it is important that the application software is designed in a IQANdesign User manual 27 . Before the download can begin. Risk assessment For all types of machinery. When sending data to the master via a modem. for example the IQAN-MC3. Protecting the application It is highly recommended to protect the application file using the built in security functions in IQANdesign and IQANrun. Design Design for safe operation is always the responsibility of the machine designer. it must also cover other activities in the machine life cycle.Application safety 1 Application Application safety This section contains information on how to improve the safety of applications. Note that when an application is being downloaded to the IQAN system. The risk assessment must not be limited to just considering faults in the control system during normal operation. a risk assessment must be made. special care must be taken. but may also influence the selection of IQAN modules. the system’s outputs become inactive. To mitigate the risks. modifying and loading the application file. It is also possible to protect the parameters. people and other objects that can be injured or damaged must be out of range of the machine’s working area. IQANdesign User manual 28 .Application safety 1 Application way as to avoid the risk of systematic faults. When verifying the function in the machine. Verification Before verification. For guidance on the design of application software. ALWAYS CONSIDER SAFETY WHEN DEVELOPING AND TESTING THE APPLICATION . please refer to section Coding guidelines on page 291. it is recommended to use IQANsimulate for early testing of the application. The keyboard shortcuts follow Windows standard whenever possible. It is highly customizable. The user interface is designed to function with different screen resolutions and font sizes.2 User interface This chapter will describe the user interface of IQANdesign. panels and other important windows. All settings. window positions and column widths are stored in Windows registry. Commonly used or important functions are accessible through tool bar buttons and keyboard shortcuts. such as the main window layout. IQANdesign User manual 29 . such as panel sizes. To the right. you find the property inspector. the application manager is located. Some of them are also present to the left on the tool bar.Main window 2 User interface Main window The main window of IQANdesign is divided into several panels. File operations All file operation commands can be found under the File menu. In the bottom panel of the property inspector you get context sensitive help from IQ. The editor has different layout and tools for different components. Every component. Under the main menu there is a tool bar with the most common functions. IQANdesign User manual 30 . The property inspector is used to define the behavior of all your application components. your IQANdesign expert and assistant. To the left. can be reached from here. modules or display pages. Often the editor shows a list of components. You can sort the list in different ways by clicking the column header you want to sort by. The middle panel is called the editor. This is where you navigate through your application. IQANdesign main window. The list contains several columns. such as channels. Select folder and file. If there is an application currently open in IQANdesign. A file open dialog box is shown. it will be closed first. The application in the clone file will be opened in IQANdesign.20-1. Open Use this command to open an application that was previously saved to a file.34).20.g. it will be closed first. IQANdesign User manual 31 . If there is an application currently open in IQANdesign. You will be asked to save any unsaved changes before the current application is closed. and then click Open. Information such as log data. Optionally the settings in the clone file can also be imported as application default settings. In the file open dialog box. and then click Open. To open these files they first need to be opened in an intermediate version of IQANdesign (version 1. IQANrun. select Clone files (*.irc) that has been saved in e.irc) in the drop down list Files of type. Select folder and file.Main window 2 User interface New Use this command to generate a new application with a master module. NOTE IQANdesign 2 can no longer open files created with older versions than IQANdesign 1. File open dialog showing clone files. You will be asked to save any unsaved changes before the current application is closed. machine users and machine ID will not be loaded. You can also open a clone file (. Edit operations All edit operation commands can be found under the Edit menu.Main window 2 User interface Reopen Contains a sub menu with your most recently used application files. The Save command will only be enabled when there are any unsaved changes. Close Same as New except that no master module will be added. Save As Saves the current application with a new file name. see section Application id on page 25. Save As is executed instead. it will be closed first. Delete. Select the one that you want to open. You will be asked to save any unsaved changes before the current application is closed. IQANdesign User manual 32 . Some of them are also present on the tool bar. such as Undo/Redo (multiple steps). If it hasn’t been saved before. If there is an application currently open in IQANdesign. If you want it to be treated as a different application. Please note that this operation will not create a new application id for your application. The menu contains common edit commands. Save Save the current application to a file. please change application id first. Rename and Find. This means that it will be considered to be the same application when sent to a master module or when used by any other IQAN software. Cut/Copy/Paste. Languages. The headings include Application. function groups and define functions for your application. Channels. Images and Security. The top level node corresponds to the application’s top level function group. This is where you start to design your application. Logs. Add channels. Adjust groups. Display pages. When a heading or item is selected in the application manager.Application manager 2 User interface Application manager The application manager is the panel to the left of the editor in the IQANdesign window. Most of these headings can be expanded to show individual items or groups that are members of that heading. IQANdesign User manual 33 . the views in the editor and the property inspector change to allow you to examine and edit the selected group or item and its properties. Modules. The application manager displays all of the main headings of the items in your application. Measure groups. Application Contains all function groups. there is a tool bar. You can also add components to a selection by holding <Ctrl> pressed while selecting. There is one button for each channel type available. The middle panel of the editor shows the selected function group’s content: channels and sub-function groups. Select multiple components by dragging a box around them. There IQANdesign User manual 34 . Add or remove a bookmark by right-clicking on a channel and select Toggle bookmark. Use this tool bar to add channels to your application. Drag and drop components to arrange them the way you want. Click on a button to add a channel of that type.Application manager 2 User interface Application editor. Bookmarks Use bookmarks to navigate efficiently in your application. At the top of the editor. or drag the button and drop it at desired position in the middle panel to add a channel there. Function inspector The bottom panel shows the function inspector. Finally. Click OK to print. IQANdesign User manual 35 . or right-click on any channel and select Go to bookmark. its icon is displayed on the associated channel. Now you can focus on a bookmarked channel simply by pressing <Ctrl> and the bookmark number. A dialog box is displayed where you can change printer. Print Select File > Print to print the current function group view. Bookmarks. Select a channel with a function to see its object groups and objects in the inspector. printer properties and/or options. The object’s calculation order can be arranged by dragging and dropping objects in the list. Function inspector. which is used to display and edit channel functions. Add objects by right-clicking in a object group list box and select Add <object type>. 1 . Channels Lists all channels in current application. Move one or more objects to another object group by drag and drop. You can also toggle a bookmark on or off by pressing <Ctrl>+<Shift> and its number.9. One sub-node for each channel type.Application manager 2 User interface are nine bookmarks available. When a bookmark is turned on. select calculation method for each object group in the combo box below the list box. Print Select File > Print to print the current channels view. printer properties and/or options.Application manager 2 User interface Channel editor. Click OK to print. A dialog box is displayed where you can change printer. IQANdesign User manual 36 . The editor shows a block diagram for the selected module. Only compatible buses and modules will allow a drop. There is one sub-node for each module in the application manager. The editor shows a tree view of all modules and buses. Use this tool bar to add modules and buses to your application. Buses can be dropped on modules and vice versa. At the top of the editor. IQANdesign User manual 37 . there is a tool bar. Module and CAN bus editor. Drag and drop components in the tree view to arrange them the way you want. or drag the button and drop it at desired position in the middle panel to add it at a specific position. Click on a button to add a module or bus of that type.Application manager 2 User interface Modules Contains all modules and buses. There is one button for each module and bus type available. Drag and drop the measure groups to order them the way you want (make sure you are sorting on column Order). IQANdesign User manual 38 . see section Measure in IQANdesign on page 192. Measure groups Lists all measure groups. For more information. When an adjust group is selected the editor shows a list of the adjust items (channels) in that adjust group. Click OK to print. Adjust groups Lists all adjust groups. printer properties and/or options. The order is used by the master display in the measure menu. There is one sub-node for each measure group. Print Select File > Print to print the current modules tree view or module block diagram. There is one sub-node for each adjust group. A dialog box is displayed where you can change printer. When a measure group is selected the editor shows a graph with measured data if available. Drag and drop the adjust groups to order them the way you want (make sure you are sorting on column Order). It is also possible to view the physical pin assignment as a list using the list tab of the module editor. The order is used by the master display in the adjust menu.Application manager 2 User interface Module editor for an IQAN-MD3 module. There is one sub-node for each image group. Expand the Modules node in the application manager. Drag and drop Inside the application manager panel it is easy to perform certain tasks using drag and drop. Languages Languages lists all the languages in the application as well as all translated texts. Assigning channels to modules is very easy. Hiding or resizing the application manager The application manager can be hidden (and shown) by clicking the splitter on the right side. see section Logs on page 212. There is also a menu item for this. Drag the splitter to resize the application manager. There is one sub-node for each log where the log items can be created and edited. For more information. There is a sub-node for each access level defined. View > Application Manager.Application manager 2 User interface Logs Lists all logs in the current application. IQANdesign User manual 39 . It can be used to define languages as well as edit and translate all multilanguage properties. For more information. Display pages Lists all display pages. see section Languages on page 221. see section Display pages in IQANdesign on page 231. Security Lists all access levels defined in the application. There is one sub-node for each display page. Images Lists all image groups. For more information. For more information. see section Access levels on page 271. For more information. see section Images and Image groups on page 254. Now simply click the channel in the editor and drag it to the module in the application manager. Then select the Channels node so that all of the channels appear in the editor. It is also possible to drag channels from the function group view. IQANdesign User manual 40 . Drag multiple channels or function groups to add more than one channel at a time. The same method can be used to set up your measure and adjust groups.Application manager 2 User interface Dropping a channel onto a module using drag and drop. Changes to the properties of any of these items are done in the property inspector by entering text. Property inspector. The property inspector displays the properties of any component that is selected in the application manager or editor. Move focus from property name to property value and vice versa by pressing <Ctrl+Tab>. IQANdesign User manual 41 . Keyboard shortcuts Use <Up> /<Down> or <Tab>/<Shift+Tab> to move between properties. NOTE Any text typed into a property edit box will not be applied until you press <Enter> or <Tab> or move to another property. Some properties use a combination of these. When focus is on the property name. simply click on it in the property inspector. or a drop down box from which to make a selection. Changing properties To change any property of a selected component. values or making selections from drop down boxes. The highlighted property will have either an edit box where you enter text or value. property “Scaled max” . type the first letter in a property name to select that property. Use <Alt+Left> and <Alt+Right> to collapse and expand group properties. a drop down box where you also can enter text or values.Property inspector 2 User interface Property inspector The property inspector is the panel to the right in the IQANdesign window. you have defined all currents in the positive IQANdesign User manual 42 .Property inspector 2 User interface If you start typing when focus is on a component in the editor. Type the new value and press <Enter> to move focus back to the editor. Changing properties on multiple channels. If all the selected components has the same property value. Enter or select a new value. Select the components in the editor. its value will be Indeterminate in the property inspector. see next section. for example Name or Description. This is very useful if you are changing the same property but with different values on many components. You can also press <Alt+Enter> to move focus back and forth between the property inspector and the editor. The property is updated on all the selected components. If you want the same property value on many components. the property inspector will show only the properties that are shared by all the selected components. Drag and drop copying You can copy the value of one property to another by dragging the source property and drop it on the destination property. focus is moved to the active property in the property inspector. If a property has different values on the selected components. For example. When multiple components are selected. Select the property you want to change. its shared value will be presented in the property inspector. This is particularly useful for group properties. Changing a property on multiple components It is possible to change a common property on several components at once. You can enable it again by right-clicking on the property name and check the automatic value option. For example the name of a log item is automatically set to the same value as the name of the channel that is logged.Property inspector 2 User interface direction for a current output channel. Go to component Properties that have a component as their value offers a shortcut if you would like to look closer on that component. Automatic property values Some properties has values that is calculated automatically by IQANdesign. simply drag the group property Positive direction and drop it on Negative direction. Drag and drop copy. IQANdesign User manual 43 . If you like to have another value than the automatic value for these properties you just need to type your own value and the automatic update will stop for that property. To use the same currents in the negative direction. Right-click on the property name and select Go to component in the popup menu. Property inspector options Select Tools > Options and go to tab Property inspector in the dialog box that is shown. The property component will be selected in the editor and its properties will be displayed in the property inspector. These properties are vital to the behavior of its component. such as <b> for bold. Example: If description is defined as Indicator switch. Description is a property that is available on all components.parking brake is released. <i> for italic and <br> for line break. IQ panel The panel directly below the property inspector is called the IQ panel.<br><i>True</ i> . When component help is displayed it will also contain the user-defined description when it is specified. Check Hide Property inspector while measuring to automatically hide the property inspector panel when you start to measure. Description example. IQ displays help concerning the currently selected component or property.parking brake is <b>not</b> released. it will produce the help text shown in the image below. The component name and description is inserted above the standard help title and text.<br><i>False</i> . IQANdesign User manual 44 . such as the Input property for a function group input channel.Property inspector 2 User interface Check Show hints when text does not fit in window to see the complete text in a hint window when you point at a component with the mouse. Specify a color for reference properties. It is possible to use simple HTML formatting though. The most commonly used HTML elements are supported. The property inspector is always disabled while measuring. The length is unlimited but it is limited to one line only. The selected components name. Both list boxes are updated to show components related to the new selected component. type and parent are listed. It is always shown on top of the main window if they are overlapping. The left one contains components that the selected component refers to. etc. Component navigator. IQANdesign User manual 45 . Parent is the component’s owner and is typically a function group.Component navigator 2 User interface Component navigator The component navigator is a great tool to view and follow component relationships in your application. adjust group. The two list boxes show related components. This is how you navigate through your application. Double-click on a component in one of the list boxes to make that the selected component. either through a property or a function/object. IQANdesign will find the component and select it in the editor for you. Component name. The right list box contains components that refer to the selected component. type and id is shown in the top panel next to IQ. The navigator is a satellite window. Select Tools > Component Navigator to open its dialog box. which means it can be open while you’re working in the main window. display page. You can decide yourself what parts of the application should be in the documentation. IQANdesign User manual 46 . Application documentation satellite window. tables and images.Application documentation 2 User interface Application documentation The application documentation function will create a design description for your application with text. To create documentation for your application select Tools > Application Documentation. Lists all measure groups and their corresponding access levels. author. Lists all adjust groups and their corresponding access levels. Contains sub sections system image. IQANdesign User manual 47 . Contains sub sections measure groups. Adds a block diagram image for each module. Select the checkboxes for those sections that you want in your application document.Application documentation 2 User interface Document sections The application document is divided in sections. The available sections are shown in the tree view on the left side. Adds one section for each module. Lists all logs and their corresponding access levels. Document sections Application info System System > System image System > Modules System > Pin list System > Module images Function groups Function groups > Interface description Function groups > Function group images Function groups > Channels Diagnostics Diagnostics > Measure groups Diagnostics > Adjust groups Diagnostics > Logs Name. Requires that System > Modules is selected. Adds an image of the contents for each function group. description. adjust groups and logs. The checkbox next to each section name specifies whether the section is part of the document or not. Adds a pin list for each module. Contains sub sections interface description. Adds information on the interface (inputs and outputs) to all function groups. function group images and channels. Requires that System > Modules is selected. pin list and module images System overview image with all modules and CAN buses in the application. see table below. comment and last changed info. Adds a list of channels in each function group. You can navigate to a section in the document by clicking on its name in the tree view. version. modules. Save document The document can be saved as an HTML file.Application documentation 2 User interface Display pages Display pages > Display page images Security Adds a section for each display page. IQANdesign User manual 48 . Select File > Save Documentation or click the Save button on the tool bar. Lists all access levels and their corresponding users. select File > Print or click the Print button on the tool bar. Refresh document If the application has changed since you opened the application documentation window. you can refresh the document to include the changes by selecting Documentation > Refresh or clicking the Refresh button on the tool bar. A sub folder named Images is created in the folder you selected. When printing the documentation page numbers and a table of contents is also included. Adds an image of each display page. Contains sub section display page images. Print document To print the document. where all images (if any) are saved for the HTML document. A save file dialog box is opened where you can select where to save the document and what name it shall have. Remember to always include the Images folder when copying or moving the HTML document. A dialog box is displayed that lets you select printer and other print options. Every line that differs between the applications is colored red.File compare 2 User interface File compare Sometimes it can be very useful to compare an application to another and see the differences between them. To find a specific item in the application you can use the find functionality provided in the compare dialog. IQANdesign User manual 49 . EXAMPLE You’re having problem with a function that you know worked in an earlier version of your application. Both applications will be converted to text and displayed side by side in a file compare dialog box. File compare dialog box. Then open the other application file that you want to compare with by selecting File > Compare With. A line that is missing in one of the applications is colored grey. Compare files First open your current application in the normal way. A file open dialog box is displayed. Use the Next Difference and Previous Difference buttons on the tool bar to move between all the application differences. for example by selecting File > Open. Select the other application file and click Open. Compare your application with the version that worked to see what has changed. In the open dialog box. change Save as type to Text file (*.File compare 2 User interface You can also reload the current application by clicking Reload. Compare with a text file If the other application that you want to compare with was created in another version of IQANdesign you probably want to see what differences IQANdesign may have caused to the application. Save As dialog box.txt). such as adding new properties. Select File > Save As and in the save dialog box that pops up. A quicker way of navigating is to use the gutter on the left side. The dialog box can remain open while you are editing your application in the main window. which can be useful if you have done changes to your application since you opened the file compare dialog box. and which lines are visible with a white rectangle.txt). change Files of type to Text files (*. see above. Enter a file name and click Save. open your current application and select File > Compare With. Go back to your current version of IQANdesign. The gutter shows an overview of the file comparison. Select the text file you created earlier and click Open. It also shows which line is selected with a small green arrow. IQANdesign User manual 50 . To do that you need to open the other application in its original version of IQANdesign and save it as a text file. The file compare dialog box is displayed. Click in the gutter to quickly move to that part. Save before sending application Automatically saves file before sending to the master. Save As after getting application Automatically brings up Save As dialog when program is uploaded from the master. Select Tools > Options to show the IQANdesign options dialog box. Dialog options.Dialog options 2 User interface Dialog options There are options that concern certain dialog boxes and the user interface in general. IQANdesign User manual 51 . Switch to the Dialog tab. Show send language options dialog Shows the sent language options dialog before sending an application. See section Send application on page 204 and section Get application on page 205 for more information. Create backup file when saving application Automatically creates a backup of an existing file when saving. Show startup dialog box Enables dialog box for creating new file. opening an existing file. getting an application from the master or opening your most recent file at startup. Create lock file when opening application Creates a lock file when opening an existing file. IQANdesign User manual 52 . File lock warning.Dialog options 2 User interface Show send/get options dialog Shows the settings option dialog box before sending and after getting an application. If another user tries to open the same file a warning dialog box is shown to him. This dialog makes it possible to select which languages from the application that should be sent to the master. The lock file prevents other users from opening the same file while you are using it. The backup is named “Backup copy of <filename>”. Dialog options 2 User interface Startup dialog box. Use large icons Select this to use large icons on the tool bar. Font Choose the font to be used in the main window and all dialog boxes. Check Use Windows font settings to use the settings from Windows Control Panel. Or, select your own font and size. The sample will show you how the selected font looks like. IQANdesign User manual 53 Show again options 2 User interface Show again options Some message dialog boxes have a check box named Never show this again. By selecting that check box, you will never be shown that information or asked that question again. Here is how you enable those messages again. Select Tools > Options to show the IQANdesign options dialog box. Show again options. Switch to the Show again tab. Select the messages that you want to be shown again. IQANdesign User manual 54 Other options 2 User interface Other options There are some other options affecting the behavior of IQANdesign. They can be found under the tab Other in the options dialog. Open the options dialog using Tools > Options. File association To associate IQANdesign with application files click on the Associate with application files button. If the button is disabled, IQANdesign is already associated with that file type. Associating IQANdesign with a file type means that if you double-click such a file in Windows Explorer for instance, IQANdesign will start and open that file. NOTE Changing file associations on Windows Vista requires administrator privileges. Undo levels The number of undo levels that should be remembered by IQANdesign can be configured using the Undo levels options. If you are experiencing performance issues due to low memory in your system it might be a good idea to lower the amount of undo levels. Automatically check for updates Select how often you want IQANdesign to automatically check for updates. Select Never to disable this function. IQANdesign User manual 55 Help 2 User interface Help The help menu contains the usual menu items. Contents Will bring up the help file, which is this book as a PDF document. IQAN Home Page Starts your web browser and goes to http://www.iqan.com. Release Notes Starts your web browser and displays release notes for this version of IQANdesign. Check for updates Check for an updated version of IQANdesign on the Internet. Requires an Internet connection. If there is a new version, you will be informed on what has been changed and then you can download and install the new version. About Displays a dialog box with licence and version information. IQANdesign User manual 56 3 Function groups A function group can be characterized as a container for channels and other function groups. Each function group must contain all components needed for its functionality. When a component needed in a function group resides outside of it, it can still be incorporated in the function group by the concept of function group inputs and outputs. A function group doesn’t always need to have inputs and outputs, it could have either inputs or outputs, both inputs and outputs or none of them. It depends on what functionality you have created inside the function group. Function group input Function group outputs Function group with both inputs and outputs. A function group can contain other function groups which in turn can contain other function groups. This creates a tree view of function groups which can be viewed in the application manager under the Application node. Function groups can be nested as deep as you like. If you double-click on a function group or select it in the application manager, it opens and you will see all of its components, channels and function groups, displayed in the editor. A component, channel or function group, can only exist in one function group. If a channel for instance, is needed in two or more function groups, its value must be passed to these function groups through function group inputs. IQANdesign User manual 57 Function group input 3 Function groups Function group input To bring values in to a function group, you use a special channel type called Function group input (FGI). You will find the FGI channel under the tab Miscellaneous in the tool bar. To bring a value in to a function group you have to add a FGI channel to that function group. You need to specify if the value is analog, digital, state machine or text. Depending on what type of value you have specified, you will also have to specify unit, limits or states. The FGI channel has one property called Input. This is the outside channel whose value you need in your function group. When you add a FGI channel to a function group, a property with the same name as the FGI channel will automatically be created on the function group. FGI properties Name Description Unit Input type Unique name for this channel. Also used as property name on the function group that contains this FGI. Enter a description for this application component. The unit for the scaled value of this channel. Only applicable when “Input type” is “Analog”. Specify whether the input is “Analog”, “Digital”, “State machine” or “Text”. If input type is “State machine”, you must specify the states as well. The input controls the value of this function group input. You can also set this property via the function group’s properties. Minimum value allowed. If the input value is less than this limit, the channel value equals this limit. Only applicable when “Input type” is “Analog”. Maximum value allowed. If the input value is greater than this limit, channel value equals this limit. Only applicable when “Input type” is “Analog”. Maximum number of characters allowed. Only applicable when “Input type” is “Text”. Input Min limit Max limit Default state name This name is used for the default state. The default state is the active state when no other state is active. Only applicable when “Input type” is “State machine”. Press the “+” button to add states to this state machine. Only applicable when “Input type” is “State machine”. IQANdesign User manual States 58 IQANdesign User manual 59 . The property value is the same as the FGI “Input” property value. see section Calculation order on page 62. Select “Yes” to make this function group enabled all the time. It contains date and time of the last edit and license number and name of the user who did the change. for example voltage inputs. All FGI channels contained in this function group corresponds to a property here. Last edited The last edited property is a read-only property that is updated as soon as a component in the function group is edited. Information on who edited this function group the last time and when. Property name and hint is the same as the FGI channel name and description. When there is more than one FGI. the function group is disabled and all its channels are set to 0 (zero)/ False. Enter a description for this application component.Function group input 3 Function groups Function group properties Name Description Enabled Enter a name to identify this function group. or select a channel to enable/disable it in runtime. Channels with error value. Last edited FGI channels Properties for function group and function group input channel. the corresponding properties are sorted in calculation order. Select the channel you want to use as an input to the function group or enter a constant value if applicable. You can only select channels that are of the type you have specified in the FGI “Input type” property. When the channel value is “False”. will be set to this value instead. Right click on the channel and select Move up in the pop up menu. The FGI will replace the channel in the entire function group.Function group input 3 Function groups Move up There is a special command for moving a channel to the parent function group. The channel will be moved to the parent group and a FGI channel with suitable properties will be created instead. IQANdesign User manual 60 . Any channel can be a function group output. Create a function group output • Right click on the channel whose value you want to pass out from the function group. An arrow symbolizes that a channel is a function group output. • Select Function group output in the pop up menu. Unlike the function group input there is no special channel type for function group outputs. Function group output.Function group output 3 Function groups Function group output The function group output is used to pass values out from the function group. The function group output can be used in the parent function group as if it were a channel in that function group. Function group with two outputs. IQANdesign User manual 61 . . in one channel. If you. When you do an application check. This can. the value calculated in the previous cycle will be used. IQANdesign User manual 62 . in the popup menu. To rearrange the calculation order It is easy to sort the channels into the order you want. you can choose to show the lines representing these references in another color. Red line if the calculation order is reversed. IQANdesign will generate a priority warning for each reference with a reversed calculation order. also be used as a feature in your function to do locking mechanisms. The calculation order is local to all function groups. refer to another channel that is positioned later in the calculation order. Right click in the function group and select Calculation order.. Calculation order dialog box.Calculation order 3 Function groups Calculation order The calculation order describes the order the master will use to calculate the contained channels and function groups. the default is red. The default calculation order will be the order in which you have added the components to your function group. The calculation order can in some cases be important to the behavior of your function group. of course. In the function group editor. This means that you will get a delay determined by the system cycle time (default is 50 ms). etc. Some tricky situations will also require multiple clicks on Auto order. IQANdesign User manual 63 . or click the button Auto order to let IQANdesign order the components for you. IQANdesign will then try to order them so that there are no priority warnings. This is not always possible.Calculation order 3 Function groups Drag and drop the list items to arrange them the way you want. since it is not always possible to order the channels in one pass. It can also be used to protect a function group from being edited while keeping it visible. Locked function groups will remain locked when exported to other applications.inputs and outputs connected to a module can be seen in the module block diagram view. This can be useful to avoid unintentional changes of a verified function. are also hidden and can not be seen anywhere in the application. IQANdesign User manual 64 . To do that you have to unlock it first.Locked function groups 3 Function groups Locked function groups To lock a function group can be useful for several reasons. A password dialog box appears. those function groups will also be locked for editing. except those defined as function group outputs. For example you might want to protect a valuable function in your application so that it is only visible for the application developer. There is one exception . Its properties will be hidden though. Description. Set function group password To lock a function group you need the set a password for it. If a function group with edit lock conains other function groups. All channels. in which case it is only locked for editing. Edit and view lock A function group that is locked for both editing and viewing can not be edited or viewed by anyone. Hidden channels may also turn up in the application check dialog box if they generate hints. in which case you have to know the password or have a safe password for the function group (see section Password database on page 263). warnings or errors. those function groups will also be locked and thereby hidden. The password is unique for that function group and is not connected to application passwords or other function group passwords. Name. All properties on a function group with edit and view lock. If a function group with edit and view lock contains other function groups. To edit the function group you have to unlock it first using the function group password or a safe password for the function group (see section Password database on page 263). Right-click on the function group and select Set password. Enabled and the input properties will still be enabled. Edit lock A function group lock can optionally allow viewing. IQANdesign User manual 65 . This is indicated with a small lock symbol in the upper right corner of the function group control. By doing that you don’t have to enter the password in IQANdesign on your computer to view or edit the function group (see section Password database on page 263 for more information about the password database).Locked function groups 3 Function groups Enter the password you want to lock the function group with. Set function group password dialog box. ATTENTION Remember to document your function group passwords in a safe place. When the password has been set you will be asked if you want to save the password to the password database. Add password dialog. there is no way to unlock that function group again. The function group is now locked. If you lose a function group password. select if you want to allow viewing of the function group and click OK. a message telling you that this function group is locked is displayed instead of the function group contents. Unlock function group dialog box. The function group is unlocked and can be edited again.Locked function groups 3 Function groups Locked function group. If you double-click a function group that is protected for both editing and viewing. Unlock a function group To unlock a function group. IQANdesign User manual 66 . Note that the password is still set for the function group. A password dialog box appears. Locked function group. right-click on it and select Unlock from the popup menu. To permanently remove the function group password select Set password for the function group. enter the old password and then leave the new password empty. or select it in the application manager. Enter correct password and click OK. which means that the next time you start IQANdesign and open your application you need to enter it again to be able to edit the locked function group (unless you have saved the password in your password database). Some modules. All text formatting channels. All module diagnostic channels except those measuring VREF. Mark as safety related Create safety related function groups by right-clicking on a function group and select Safety Related. Function groups containing such functions can then be marked as safety related. All PIN code channels. where there is a need to prove the safety integrity of each implemented safety function. All interactive message channels. All system output channels except those measuring cycle time. All SMS input channels. Safety related function groups use a stricter check when application check is executed. See tables below for details on what is detected as errors by application check when using safety related function groups. for example IEC 61508 or EN ISO 13849. Channels not allowed in safety related function groups SOUT PWM MDGN SYSOUT TP TFC CMSG IMSG PCC SMSIN All servo out channels. For these applications. This is helpful when designing safety functions that needs to be certified according to a safety standard. like the IQAN-MC3. Safety related function group. are especially suited for applications with higher demands on functional safety.Safety related function groups 3 Function groups Safety related function groups All IQAN modules are designed with the functional safety requirements of mobile machines in mind. All text parameter channels. IQANdesign User manual 67 . Safety related function groups are marked with a lamp symbol in the upper right corner. All PWM output channels. it is wise to collect safety related functions in one or more function groups to separate them from other functionality. All conditional message channels. PGOUT. DM1. PIN. All virtual digital in channels. GFIN and GFOUT channels. Max limit less than or equal to min limit. Transmit rate is not defined. TSC1. Max or min limit not defined. Mod. Timeout is not defined. Master module is not certified for functional safety. SPN. Bitwise or. Shift left or Shift right are used. Not assigned to module certified for functional safety. The points are not defined in increasing input value order.Safety related function groups 3 Function groups SMSOUT VDIN CAN related channels All SMS output channels. POUT. Bitwise and. Max limit less than or equal to min limit. All PGIN. When using band pass or band stop filter the second cutoff frequency is smaller than or equal to the first cutoff frequency. The detection delay time is not dividable with the system cycle time. Operators Div. Adjust group contains safety related channel(s) but is not protected by an access level or PIN code. Bitwise not. FGI APPIN APPOUT Comparator channel (AAC/ADC/DDC) Multi vector object Master module I/O channels Adjust group Math operators IQANdesign User manual 68 . Other errors related to safety related function groups Adjustable/stored channel Not protected by access level or PIN code. COUT FP BWF Max parameter less than or equal to its corresponding min parameter. The cutoff frequencies are less than or equal to 0 or greater than or equal to half the system sample frequency. Bitwise xor. ) also. Selected component(s) without references Components with content are exported. click Selected component(s) without references and then click OK. IQANdesign User manual 69 .. The function group with all its contained function groups and channels with functions/objects will be exported. Export dialog box. in the function group editor select the function group(s) and/or channel(s) that you want to export. etc.. • To export referenced components (such as adjust groups. Function groups/Channels Function groups and/or channels that resides outside of the exported components will not be exported. Export First. Click OK to continue. Selected component(s) with references Same as above. to open the export dialog box. but referenced components are also exported. A save file dialog box appears. Select a folder where you want your exported file stored and enter a file name. Example: You have selected a function group. • To export only the selected components (with their content). click Selected component(s) with references instead. display pages. Select multiple components by holding <Ctrl> pressed while you select or drag a box around them.Export/Import 3 Function groups Export/Import It is possible to export one or more function groups (and single channels) to a separate file and later import that file to another application. Any component that is not contained by the function group will not be exported. Select File > Export. Please check your application thoroughly after an import. If no function group is selected they will be added to the main function group. Note that adjust items that don’t refer to any of the exported channels are excluded from its adjust group. Pages or pages with controls that refer to any of the exported channels are exported. IQANdesign User manual 70 . You will not be warned about this.. Components that exists in both the current application and the imported application file will be duplicated. All components are imported to your current application. All controls on an exported page are exported regardless of whether they refer to any of the exported channels or not. Then select File > Import. Measure groups Adjust groups Logs Languages Pages Images Security Import First open the function group in the current application that you want to import to. Measure groups and items that refer to any of the exported channels are exported. CAN buses are not exported. Adjust groups and items that refer to any of the exported channels are exported.. and select the application file that you want to import. It can be a complete application or an earlier exported file. Note that measure items that don’t refer to any of the exported channels are excluded from its measure group.Export/Import 3 Function groups Modules All modules with any of the exported channels connected will be exported. Access levels that refer to any of the above exported components are exported. Function groups and channels will be imported to the function group selected in the application manager. Logs will not be exported. Languages are not exported. Images that refer to any of the above exported components are exported. select Tools > Options and click the Function groups tab in the options dialog box. Select Show hints to enable hints in the editor. When measuring they also present value and status. description and type for the component you are pointing at.Function groups. IQANdesign User manual 71 .Function group options 3 Function groups Function group options To set options for the function group editor. Hints contain information on name. Options . so that you can not move them. Draw references lines are used to configure the way reference lines are drawn between components. Freeze positions If you want to prevent moving components in a function group by mistake. Select All components to have lines drawn between all components that refer to each other within a function group.Function group options 3 Function groups Select Show grid to turn on the grid in the editor background. Freeze positions icon. When grid is visible. The color selection boxes let you specify colors for different channel types or for indicating hints. The later ones have higher priority than the channel type colors. components will snap to it if dragged. Also. This will freeze all component position in the current function group. right-click in the function group and select Freeze positions in the popup menu. warnings or errors on a component. set the grid size and color. Select Selected component to have lines drawn for references for the selected component only. Also. Frozen positions are indicated by a small icon in the top right corner of the editor. specify color for the reference lines. IQANdesign User manual 72 . What you get out depends on what type of object you have selected and its properties. Object groups are specific for each channel type. multi vector and math. so that the object with the highest or lowest value will control the object group’s value.4 Functions A function is created by objects that are grouped in object groups. You put something in and get something out. There are five types of objects: single. An object is like a "black box". vector. For example. dual. the object values in a controlling object group can either be multiplied to a product or compared. IQANdesign User manual 73 . An object group’s value is decided by its object values and the selected object group method. The primary role of the controlling object group is to control the channel’s output value.Object groups 4 Functions Object groups A function consists of two or three object groups depending on channel type. such as an internal digital channel. This group has higher priority than the controlling object group. If this group’s value is less than the controlling object group. the function value will equal the limiting object group value. such as a math channel. You will find the object groups on all channels where you can create functions. IQANdesign User manual 74 . for example. Controlling object group t Limiting object group t Function value t Controlling and limiting object groups. Activating The activating object group is used with digital value channels. Each object group affects the function in its own way. Controlling and Limiting object groups in a function for a math channel. the input from a lever or a pedal. Object group types Controlling The controlling object group is used with analog value channels. The controlling objects are generally made up of signals that the operator can influence himself. Limiting Works together with the controlling object group. This group has higher priority than the activating object group. Hiding has higher priority than showing when they are activated simultaneously. Used with counters and memorizing channels. Channel value is increased/decreased when object group or object value changes from False to True. If both increasing and decreasing object groups changes simultaneously nothing happens with the channel value. Increasing/Decreasing These object groups are used to increase or decrease a channel’s value.Object groups 4 Functions Blocking Works together with the activating object group. Resetting The resetting object group is used to reset a channel’s value to zero or a predefined value. the function value will be False regardless of the activating object group value. The blocking object group is often used to make a function safe in certain situations. Messages are shown/hidden when object group value changes from False to True. The only objects that are affected by the object group method are the resulting objects. Activating object group t Blocking object group t Function value t Activating and blocking object groups. Resulting objects are objects that are not referred to by other objects. Object group method Each object group also has a method that specifies how its objects are combined to create the object group value. If this group’s value is True. IQANdesign User manual 75 . Used with counters. Showing/Hiding These object groups work together and are used for interface channels to show or hide messages on the master display. Channel value is reset when object group value changes from False to True. This group has higher priority than any other group in the same function. In the above example. This will multiply the value of object C with the value of object D. Result = ((Object A/100)·(Object B/100)·(Object C/100)·. Objects A and B are not resulting objects.)·100 Applicable to Controlling and Limiting object groups. for example object C’s value is 70% and object D’s value is 50%. Object A and B are implicitly used through object C in the calculation. Result will also be in percent. IQANdesign User manual 76 . since they are referred to by object C. The object group method selected in the example above is Multiply (%). The result will have the same sign as the largest object. Multiply (%) Object values are multiplied. The result is the largest object. MaxOf (Absolute) Absolute value of object values are compared. Resulting objects are indented differently from other objects.Object groups 4 Functions Resulting objects. The (%) in Multiply (%) means that the operands are expected to be in percent and the result will also be in percent. Values are expected to be in percent. The product is the value of the object group.. Value of controlling object A t Value of controlling object B 50% t Value of object group t Two objects. gives the result 35%. objects C and D are resulting objects.. the result will be the positive value. with latching functionality. Example: Object A = 5. If all objects are equal but with different signs. Applicable to Controlling and Limiting object groups. The result will have the same sign as the smallest object. the result will be the positive value. the result is -25. Activation of the object group is not possible until the Blocking object group and at least one activating object goes False. IQANdesign User manual 77 . all the objects have to be true to change the counter’s value. Object B = -40. And Boolean conjunction. Latching And Same as And. it only takes one of the objects to turn false and then true again to change the counter’s value. activating object group. Applicable to Controlling and Limiting object groups. the result is True. Applicable to all object groups except Controlling and Limiting. The object group stays True until the Blocking object group goes True. If all objects are True or not equal to 0. This means that if all objects are true. MinOf (Absolute) Absolute value of object values are compared. result is 5. When used in an increasing or decreasing object group. Example: Object A = -25. otherwise False. Applicable to Activating object groups. Object A t Object B t Object group value t And method. Object B = 15.Object groups 4 Functions If all objects are equal but with different signs. The result is the smallest object. Object groups 4 Functions t Activating objects in an activating object group t Blocking object group t Function value Latching And method. Or Boolean disjunction. If one object is True or not equal to 0, the result is True, otherwise False. Applicable to all object groups except Controlling and Limiting. Object A t Object B t Object group value t Or method. When used in an increasing or decreasing object group, the object group value has to become true to increase/decrease the channel’s value. T1, T2 > two times cycle time T1 T2 Increasing object A Increasing object B Counter’s output value An event counter with two increasing objects. IQANdesign User manual 78 Object groups 4 Functions Latching Or Same as Or, with latching functionality. The object group stays True until the Blocking object group goes True. Applicable to Activating object groups. t Activating objects in an activating object group t Blocking object group t Function value Latching Or method. IQANdesign User manual 79 Objects 4 Functions Objects There are five different object types. Each type has its own characteristics and range of uses. Single object The single object is used to represent a channel value or a constant value. Output = Input EXAMPLE If the controlling object is a Joystick with no deadband you can use the single object. Input = Joystick The controlling object’s value will follow the Joystick value. Dual object The dual object gives you one of two values, depending on the input value. if (Input = True) then (Output = Out 1) else (Output = Out 2) Object value Out 1 Out 2 True False Input value Dual object. If the input value is True or not equal to 0 (zero), the object’s value equals the first value (Out 1). If the input value is False or equals 0 (zero), the object’s value equals the second value (Out 2). Vector object The vector object is a linear function defined by two points (In 1, Out 1) and (In 2, Out 2). Output = Out 1 + (Input - In 1) · (Out 2 - Out 1) / (In 2 - In 1) IQANdesign User manual 80 Objects 4 Functions Out 2 Out 1 In 1 In 2 Vector object. A vector object is defined by an input value and two breakpoints. Between the two breakpoints there is a linear function based upon the input signal. EXAMPLE If you have a lever that controls the telescope, you may want to have 10% deadband to get a more stabilized signal from the lever. Use two vector objects: Input = Lever telescope 10%->0%, 100%->100% (positive direction) Input = Lever telescope -10%->0%, -100%->-100% (negative direction). Outside range Specify the output value behavior when the input value is outside the range In 1 - In 2. Freeze value will freeze the output to Out 1 or Out 2 depending on whether Input is less than or greater than the range In 1 - In 2. Return to zero will set the output value to 0. Select Extrapolate to extrapolate the output value outside the specified range. Multi vector object The multi vector object is a function defined by two or more points and an input value. When using only two points it equals the vector object. The main purpose of the multi vector object is to simplify the creation of broken curves by allowing you to add more than two points. The points must be ordered sequentially starting with the lowest In value and ending with the highest. IQANdesign User manual 81 Objects 4 Functions Out 3 Out 2 Out 4 Out 1 In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4 Multi vector object. Outside range Specify the output value behavior when the input value is outside the range defined by the In values of the first and last points. Freeze value will freeze the output to the Out value of the first or last point depending on whether Input is less than or greater than the define input range. Return to zero will set the output value to 0. Select Extrapolate to extrapolate the output value outside the specified range. Math object The math object is defined by an operator and one, two or three operands. You have access to the following operators: Relational = Equality <> Inequality < Less than > Greater than <= Less than or equal to >= Greater than or equal to Inside Inside range True if "Operand 1" equals "Operand 2", otherwise False. False if "Operand 1" equals "Operand 2", otherwise True. True if "Operand 1" is less than "Operand 2", otherwise False. True if "Operand 1" is greater than "Operand 2", otherwise False. True if "Operand 1" is less than or equal to "Operand 2", otherwise False. True if "Operand 1" is greater than or equal to "Operand 2", otherwise False. "Operand 2" < "Operand 1" < "Operand 3". True if "Operand 1" is inside the range "Operand 2" - "Operand 3", otherwise False. If "Operand 2" is greater than "Operand 3" they are swapped before condition is evaluated. IQANdesign User manual 82 Objects 4 Functions Outside Outside range "Operand 2" > "Operand 1" or "Operand 1" > "Operand 3". True if "Operand 1" is outside the range "Operand 2" - "Operand 3", otherwise False. If "Operand 2" is greater than "Operand 3" they are swapped before condition is evaluated. Arithmetic + Addition Subtraction * Multiplication. / Division. div Integer division mod Remainder EXAMPLE Calculates "Operand 1" + "Operand 2". Calculates "Operand 1" - "Operand 2". Calculates "Operand 1" · "Operand 2". Calculates "Operand 1" / "Operand 2". Example: 7 / 2 = 3.5 Calculates "Operand 1" div "Operand 2". Example: 7 div 2 = 3 Calculates "Operand 1" mod "Operand 2". Example: 7 mod 2 = 1 An easy example how to use the div and mod operators is to calculate how many hours and minutes is 135 minutes: 135 div 60 = 2 135 mod 60 = 15 gives 2 hours and 15 minutes. Boolean not Boolean negation and Boolean conjunction. not(False) = True and not(True) = False False and False = False False and True = False True and False = False True and True = True IQANdesign User manual 83 Objects 4 Functions or Boolean disjunction False or False = False False or True = True True or False = True True or True = True False xor False = False False xor True = True True xor False = True True xor True = False xor Boolean exclusive disjunction. "Operand 1" is shifted "Operand 2" steps to the right. "Operand 1" is shifted "Operand 2" steps to the left.2) = 104. sin cos asin acos tan atan Logical (bitwise) Sine of the angle. Result resolution is at least 3 decimals. Abs(104. "Operand 1" Angle must be n·(0 . Inverse cosine of "Operand 1". Trigonometric Operand resolution for trigonometric operators is at least 0.1°. Tangent of "Operand 1" tan(X) = sin(X) / cos(X).360°). Other Abs Absolute value of "Operand 1". "Operand 1" Angle must be n·(0 . Bitwise and. Bitwise or. Arctangent of "Operand 1".360°).2 IQANdesign User manual 84 . Bitwise xor. Example: Abs(-27) = 27. Bitwise shift right. bnot band bor bxor shl shr Bitwise negation. Inverse sine of "Operand 1". Cosine of the angle. Bitwise shift left. Calculates "Operand 1" * "Operand 2". Example: "Operand 1" = 5. Smallest value of "Operand 1" and "Operand 2" Largest signed value of Abs("Operand 1") and Abs("Operand 2"). Example: Operand values 70% and 50% gives the result 35%.t2) is always the system cycle time. Calculates the derivative of "Operand 1". Rounds "Operand 1" to the nearest integer (whole number). Round(1. Result is -25. "Operand 1" is base and "Operand 2" is exponent. Percent multiplication. The resulting unit is ["Unit of Operand 1"/s]. Derivative. If Abs("Operand 1") equals Abs("Operand 2") and one is positive and the other negative. If "Operand 1" is exactly halfway between two whole numbers. the result is always the even number.Objects 4 Functions MaxOf MinOf MaxOfAbs Largest value of "Operand 1" and "Operand 2". the result will be the positive value. If Abs("Operand 1") equals Abs("Operand 2") and one is positive and the other negative. "Operand 2" = 15. Natural logarithm (Ln(e) = 1) of "Operand 1". Step size (t1 . Smallest signed value of Abs("Operand 1") and Abs("Operand 2"). Result is 5. Round(2. Example: "Operand 1" = -25. "Operand 2" = -40. This method of rounding is often called "Banker’s Rounding". Example: Round(1.04) = 1. the result will be the positive value.5) = 2.5) = 2. MinOfAbs Sqrt Power Ln Round *% f´ IQANdesign User manual 85 . Raises base to any power. Square root of "Operand 1". Example: The derivative of a distance [m] is the speed of which it changes [m/s]. Both operands are expected to be in percent and the result will also be in percent. Status Status = Equality Status <> Inequality Status < Less than Status > Greater than Status <= Less than or equal to Status >= Greater than or equal to True if the status of "Operand 1" equals "Operand 2". otherwise False. otherwise True. The unit of "Operand 1" is expected to be [/s]. otherwise False True if the status of "Operand 1" is greater than "Operand 2". True if the status of "Operand 1" is less than "Operand 2".t2) is always the system cycle time. Example: The integral of a speed [m/s] is the travelled distance [m]. otherwise False. Calculates the integral of "Operand 1". IQANdesign User manual 86 . like showing an error message on the display. The status values can be useful. otherwise False. for example if you want to do some actions when a certain error were to appear. otherwise False. True if the status of "Operand 1" is greater than or equal to "Operand 2". False if the status of "Operand 1" equals "Operand 2". Step size (t1 .Objects 4 Functions ∫ Integral. True if the status of "Operand 1" is less than or equal to "Operand 2". Interface and CAN. Calculation. IQANdesign User manual 87 . do calculations. control the display and control outputs. Miscellaneous. or the PID channel that can do PID regulations based on a command and a feedback value.5 Channels Channels are probably the most important components in an application. There are a number of different channel types. These channel types are divided into five different groups: Inputs/Outputs. They are used to get input from the machine. like the voltage input that can measure the value from a 5V sensor and scale it to another unit. each one specialized to do a specific task. See section IQ panel on page 44. As part of the process you should establish a naming convention for the channels that will be easy to understand. For analog inputs. you should standardize on the directions of movement. Almost every movement has a positive and a negative direction. for example “Boom”. partly to facilitate things when documenting the application and partly when troubleshooting or rebuilding. Enter a text that describes the purpose or function of the channel. a good naming standard is to name the input or output after its active state. you would normally give names based on the measured value. The text you enter here is also displayed in the IQ panel below the property inspector when the channel is selected. Analog outputs should be named after their function.Naming channels 5 Channels Naming channels When you create an application. Direction suggestions Up Down Forward Reverse Right Left Right turn Left turn Out In Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative IQANdesign User manual 88 . For digital inputs and outputs. for example “Oil pressure. you may start by creating channels and defining their properties. It is very important to be consistent with the direction selection when you create an application. telescope” or “Angle sensor. Every channel also has a property named Description that you are encouraged to use. boom”. Direction In addition to naming channels clearly. which is divided into four sub-ranges. numeric. log text information or send text messages via SMS. The status values Disabled and OK are excluded from the lists since all channels can have these statuses. Text Text values are used to for example display information on the master display. Numeric A numeric value is a real number (floating point) in the range 1. If a numeric value is used where a boolean value is expected. State State values are used to select active state on other components. the value type can be boolean (False/ True). and some are even logged in the system log: • 0 . Boolean Boolean values are used for digital channel types. and so on. errors or other info. Value The value is calculated using a combination of input values. the value 0 is interpreted as False and all other values as True. unit.255. They can often be used as numeric values.5·10-45 3. Each channel in this chapter has a section describing its value. Default state is then defined as 0. It is an integer in the range 0 . range and type.63: Info IQANdesign User manual 89 .Value and status 5 Channels Value and status A channel has a value and a status. EXAMPLES A voltage input uses a measured value and its properties Min. properties and/or functions. They can not be used in numeric calculations. state or text. A math channel uses its functions to calculate its value. Some status changes are shown as on-screen messages or LED codes on the master. Max. first state as 1. Scaled min and Scaled max to calculate its value.4·1038 (negative and positive) with 7 significant digits. A state value can also be used in numeric calculations. There is also a table listing all possible status values. False is then interpreted as the numeric value 0 and True is interpreted as 1. Status The status is used to indicate warnings. Depending on channel type. 191: Warning • 192 . Msg Log 128 High temperature 129 Low supply voltage 130 High supply voltage 131 Date and time not set 132 Start block 133 Low alarm 134 High alarm 135 Saturated 137 Checksum error 192 Low error 193 High error 194 Overload x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x IQANdesign User manual 90 .127: OK • 128 . Status OK. Status values n 0 1 64 Status Disabled Not evaluated OK Description Component disabled.255: Error In the table below. Lever not in zero position at power-up.Value and status 5 Channels • 64 . Module internal temperature. Value below low alarm level on input channel. Current is 50-100% of commanded. (Only IQAN modules) Applies to master module only. Checksum calculation error for adjustable/stored value Value below low error level on input channel. Value over high alarm level on input channel. column Msg states whether a system message dialog box is displayed or not and column Log states whether a record is created in the system log or not. Value over high error level on input channel. (Only IQAN modules) Module supply voltage. Not evaluated. Not evaluated due to lazy evaluation. Not able to output commanded current. Output overloaded. (Only IQAN modules) Module supply voltage. CAN bus does not work. Msg Log x x x x x x x x 195 Open load 196 Division by zero 197 Calculation overflow 198 Negative square root 199 Invalid argument 200 J1939 error 201 J1939 not available 202 Timeout x x 203 No contact 204 Multiple address 205 VREF error 206 Internal error 207 Critical error 208 Pin conflict 209 CAN bus error 210 Address error 211 Out of range 212 Input error 213 Diff check error x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Error detected on input channel (used by x AAC. Invalid address tag on master module. Current is less than 50% of commanded. Timeout detected on parameter group input (PGIN) or generic frame input (GFIN). IQANdesign User manual 91 . (Applies to all modules) Two or more IQAN modules with same address detected. DDC and ADC channels). Parameter (PIN) not available in J1939 parameter group (PGIN). Internal IQAN module error. J1939 error detected at parameter input channel (PIN). Math calculation. No contact with expansion module. A parameter or channel value is out of range.Value and status 5 Channels n Status Description Output is disconnected. Input channels not equal (used by AAC. VREF error detected on IQAN module. Critical IQAN module error. Invalid channel type connected to module pin. Math calculation. x DDC and ADC channels). Math calculation. Math calculation. Math calculation. A math channel gets status Division by zero when one of its function objects generates a division by zero error. The table below lists all statuses that are propagated from objects to channels. Division by zero Calculation overflow Negative square root Invalid argument Math calculation. Standard statuses The status values Disabled and OK are excluded from the lists since all channels can have these statuses. Propagated object status Channels that have function. Math calculation. Math calculation.Value and status 5 Channels EXAMPLES A voltage input gets status High alarm when its value rises above the value specified by property High alarm. IQANdesign User manual 92 . There are more than one module with the same address on the bus. Status tables Each channel section in this chapter has a table listing all possible status values for its channel type. inherit the module’s status in some events. for example voltage inputs or module diagnostics. gets the status of its objects in some events. Inherited module status Channels that are assigned to a module. Only applicable to IQAN expansion modules. Module is offline. The table below lists all statuses that are inherited. for example math channels or event counters. Disabled No contact Multiple address error Module is disabled. Voltage in . Properties Unit Reference voltage The unit for the scaled value of this channel. Select the reference voltage that this voltage input is connected to. These are the limits an operator can adjust this channel’s parameters within. Select a predefined device type to automatically get the correct limits and calibration values for that device. The error value is used when there is an error situation for this channel. for example temperature. pressure. The input voltage range to this channel type is normally 0-5000mV. If you set min and max limit for a parameter to the same value. The voltage input channel is used to measure analog sensors. All inputs connected to a reference voltage where an error is detected will receive error status “VREF error”. etc. lever position. Scaled max Scaled min min max Scaling of the input signal.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Inputs/Outputs All of the input and output channels are physical channels and you will find them as inputs and outputs on the different modules. if the connected sensor is broken. not raw value. The signal can be scaled to an application dependent range. Select “Not used” if connected to an external reference. Error value Device type Limits IQANdesign User manual 93 . that parameter will not be adjustable. the channel will use this value as its output value instead of the measured value. For further information about the physical channels see the specific instructions for the modules. For example. Enter scaled value.VIN A physical analog input. Specify the limits for min and max input. angle. Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Calibration > Min Calibration > Max Calibration > Adjustable Enter raw sensor value when sensor is in “Min” position. Enter a value for the low/high alarm level. for example. etc. Example: Setting the low level to -25°C will create an alarm when the temperature (this channel’s value) falls below -25°C. This opens the device manager. Enter the scaled value of the sensor “Max” position. which means they will be the smallest/ largest measured value during adjustment in IQANrun. or want to add one. Select “Yes” to make this channel adjustable. Select a device in the list and click Select. Calibration > Adjust type Calibration > Scaled min Calibration > Scaled max Alarm > Low/High Alarm > Low/High value Device type Enter a name for your input device. If adjust type is set to manual the min and max parameter are adjusted manually. -30°C. 130°C. If you are using a predefined device type. Select how the channel is adjusted in IQANrun. Also. You can also use a channel to specify alarm level. IQANdesign User manual 94 . Enter raw sensor value when sensor is in “Max” position. Enter scaled value. etc. You must also add this channel to an “Adjust group” to be able to adjust it via the master display or IQANrun. If set to auto the minimum and maximum values are detected automatically while adjusting. make sure that property “Alarm low/high” above isn’t set to “No”. not raw value. click the button to the right. Select “Yes” to specify a low/high alarm level for this channel. You can also select a channel to control whether a low/high alarm level should be used or not. Examples: 785 cm. The channel is updated with the values of the selected device. Examples: 90 cm. The alarm will be logged (if enabled in the System log) and presented to the driver. Enter the scaled value of the sensor “Min” position. Temperature sensor TS100. Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Device manager. Device data for pressure sensor IQAN-SP35. Specify file name and folder in the save file dialog box that appears. The new device is added to the list. IQANdesign User manual 95 . Select all devices that you want to export and click Export. use the export/import function. To copy devices to another computer or colleague. You can also edit or delete existing devices. Click Add and fill in all device data in the dialog box that appears. If you often use the same device in your application it can be a good idea to add it to your device database. Carefully consider critical and dangerous situations when the channel’s input value is incorrect and enter a suitable replacement value. Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. low= Min/2 Illegal value. click Import and select the same file.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels To import it on another computer. ATTENTION An illegal value can cause a faulty function on the machine. the input’s voltage range must be within the min and max limits as shown in the above diagram. This is to avoid jeopardizing the machine’s function and safety.Max)/2)+ Max Scaled min Min Max Vin max Voltage range analog input Detection of illegal value. it is possible to adjust its Min and Max via the master display or IQANrun. you will be asked if you want overwrite or keep the original. Error detection Scaled value Scaled max Illegal value. IQANdesign User manual 96 . high= ((Vin max. If the signal reaches the illegal range. For the master to be able to detect errors such as short circuit or power failure. Property Adjustable must be set to Yes to be able to adjust it. a signal error is detected and the channel’s scaled value will be replaced by the specified error value. Replace existing device confirmation. For each imported device that already exists in the database. See property Unit. Status Low alarm High alarm Low error High error Division by zero Out of range VREF error Inherited module status Value is lower than the specified low alarm level. use calibrations Min = 0. False or True. see section Error detection on page 96. Unit should be mV. See property Calibration.DIN A physical input with digital value. Min equals max. Value is below its valid range. Scaled min = 0 and Scaled max = 5000. position sensors and guards.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Value Value Unit Range Type Scaled value. Analog (Real number) If you need the raw value instead. Digital in . see section Error detection on page 96. See section Inherited module status on page 92. Settings are not within limits. There is an error detected on the VREF this channel is connected to. Value is above its valid range. Value is higher than the specified high alarm level. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital IQANdesign User manual 97 . Value Value Unit Range Type Boolean value. Max = 5000. This type of input is mostly used for switches. No other properties besides name and description. you present the value in km/h instead of the frequency value measured on the channel. Unit is [pulses] if “Type” is “Pulse count”. Enter the scaled value of the sensor “Max” value. Behavior is module dependant. Only applicable if “Type” is “Pulse count”. Examples: 785 cm. and [Hz] if “Type” is “Frequency”. page 93. Properties Unit Type The unit for the scaled value of this channel. etc. Please see module documentation for more information. 2350 RPM.FIN A physical analog input. For example. The input signal should be converted to a readable value for the operator. etc.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Status Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. Useful for position sensors. The frequency input channel is used to either count pulses or measure frequency. and it will stay zero as long as the resetting channel is True. Useful for frequency pick-ups. The value is stored in non-volatile memory so that it is preserved during power off. Enter raw sensor value when sensor is in “Max” position. the value of this channel is reset to zero. Store value Resetting channel Max Scaled max Fast response Alarms IQANdesign User manual 98 . Select “Frequency” to use it as a frequency input. Select a channel to reset the value. Select “Pulse count” to use this input to count pulses. Frequency in . See Alarm properties for Voltage in. if the input signal is a speed. revolutions (frequency). etc. With fast response all frequencies below 20 Hz will be detected as zero. Typically it is used to measure position (pulse count) or speed. When the resetting channel’s value changes from False to True. some modules may have a different function. The value can be presented on the display together with the defined unit. See property Unit. Status Low alarm High alarm Inherited module status Value is lower than the specified low alarm level. 7 significant digits Analog (Real number) If you need the raw value instead. revolutions (frequency) including direction.. Value Value Unit Range Type Scaled value. but at a sacrifice of low frequencies. It is bidirectional. See section Inherited module status on page 92. Actual frequency 0 Hz e. Unit should be Hz if Type is set to Frequency. IQANdesign User manual 99 . Typically it is used to measure position (pulse count) or speed. Directional frequency in .Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Fast response There is a faster method of detecting zero frequency. The directional frequency input channel is used to either count pulses or measure frequency.g. use calibrations Max = 1000 and Scaled max = 1000. This method has only an uncertainty of one sample time when a zero frequency is detected. Properties Same properties as a frequency input channel with one addition.DFIN A physical analog input. Value is higher than the specified high alarm level. which means it can add/subtract pulses or measure frequency clockwise/counter-clockwise. locked brake Delay before 0 Hz is detected With fast response Without fast response With and without fast response. IQANdesign User manual 100 . Middle position corresponds to 0%. The value range for each direction is -100% to 100%.DAC These channels are found on IQAN lever modules. 7 significant digits Analog (Real number) If you need the raw value instead. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Scaled value. Directional analog channel .Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Sensor type Select sensor type. Unit should be Hz if Type is set to Frequency. Status Low alarm High alarm Inherited module status Value is lower than the specified low alarm level. This channel has no other properties besides name and description. use calibrations Max = 1000 and Scaled max = 1000. “Quadrature” is a sensor with two phase-shifted frequency signals. There is one channel for each direction X. Value Value Unit Range Type Scaled value. 0% equals center position Analog (Real number) Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. Value is higher than the specified high alarm level. Y and Z. See property Unit. See section Inherited module status on page 92. “Frequency/ Direction” is a sensor with one frequency signal and a digital signal for the direction. % -100% to 100%. If enabled.. “Right” or “Clockwise”. such as output high. This function will decrease the frequency bandwidth of the output signal whenever the change of the output signal is smaller than BWL window. This function is particularly good to use for signals that are “nervous” but where a normal filter would decrease the overall dynamics of the signal.COUT A physical analog output. set property “Bidirectional” to “No”. this channel will be automatically selected when its output value isn’t zero and the user is in adjustment mode. the negative direction will not appear in the adjust menu. Also. such as joystick control for a crane function. The bandwidth limit will decrease linearly with smaller changes. When the signal change is larger than the window. no bandwidth limitation will be used. “No” means it is unidirectional. Enter a text to describe the negative direction. This text is presented to the operator when he is to adjust this output. that is. a valve.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Current out . The current output channel is primarily used to control proportional valves. “Left” or “Counter-clockwise”. It will automatically get the correct limits and currents for that device type. Negative direction Bidirectional BWL Auto select Device type IQANdesign User manual 101 . e. if you don’t have a load connected to the negative output. Band Width Limiting. Properties Positive direction Enter a text to describe the positive direction. This text is presented to the operator when he is to adjust this output. In this way you avoid unnecessary errors. for example when controlling a motor. If you only need the positive direction. When the change of the signal is zero. Select “Yes” to make this output bidirectional.g. when you adjust this channel. for example “Down”. output low. it can only have a positive value. the bandwidth will also be zero. for example “Up”. Select a device type for the connected actuator device. The first mode is the default mode and it is always available. this is the only mode. If you set min and max limit for a parameter to the same value. Select a state channel to use as mode selector. Input channel Mode selector Default mode Adjustable Min current [mA] Max current [mA] Start slope [ms] Stop slope [ms] Device type See section Device type on page 94. this is the time it will take for the output to change from max to min value. Current output devices have different values than voltage input devices. If command value changes from 100% to 0%. If command value changes from 0% to 100%. Select a channel to control the value of this output. Stop slope makes the stop of this function smoother. Min current for this mode. The selected channel should have a value range of -100 100%. You can have more than one mode for this channel.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Limits Specify the limits for min and max output and start and stop slopes. If you don’t specify a mode selector. IQANdesign User manual 102 . Input values below -100 or above 100 will result in maximum output (“Max current [mA]”) in corresponding direction. but the handling is the same. this is the time it will take for the output to change from min to max value. This current equals command value 100%. Max current for this mode. A mode is a set of properties. A mode is a set of properties. You must also add this channel to an “Adjust group” to be able to adjust it via the master display or IQANrun. The mode to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. that parameter will not be adjustable. see property “Mode selector”. Select “Yes” to make this mode adjustable. One mode for each state will be added to this channel. Start slope makes the start of this function smoother. This current equals command value 0%. These are the limits an operator can adjust this channel’s parameters within. PWM A physical analog output. See section Inherited module status on page 92. Current is less than 50% of commanded. mA Dependent on mode and current settings. Current is 50100% of commanded. Settings are not within limits. Output overloaded. Property Adjustable must be set to Yes for each mode that you want to adjust.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. it is possible to adjust its Min current. Output characteristics Current [mA] Max current Min current Start slope Stop slope t [ms] Current and slope times. IQANdesign User manual 103 . Start slope and Stop slope via the master display or IQANrun. The properties for a PWM output are the same as for a current output. Not able to output commanded current. The difference is the output value. PWM uses modulation ratio in [%]. Analog (Integer number) Open load Overload Saturated Out of range Inherited module status Output is disconnected. COUT uses [mA]. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated current. The PWM output channel is primarily used to control Parker Pulsar® valves. PWM out . Max current. Output overloaded. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated modulation ratio. Settings are not within limits. To get the perfect output characteristic you have to enter the proper MR and slope time values for each channel. The digital output channel is primarily used to control lamps. % MR max MR min time Resulting output signal Function value MR min MR max time The PWM output values.DOUT A physical digital output. on/off valves or relays. Analog (Integer number) Open load Overload Out of range Inherited module status Output is disconnected. See section Inherited module status on page 92. Digital out . called MR.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels PWM output characteristic The output values are defined as pulse width modulation ratio. % Dependent on mode and settings. Actual value is less than 50% of commanded. PWM frequency The PWM frequency is common for all PWM outputs on some modules and separate on others. See details for each specific module in chapter Modules. IQANdesign User manual 104 . Select a channel to control the value of this output. IQANdesign User manual 105 . Delay off [ms] Soft start time [ms] Soft stop time [ms] Peak and hold Peak time [ms] Hold value [%] Input channel Delay on/off Use the Delay on to activate the channel a certain time after the Input channel has been activated. This is the time it will take for the channel value to change to False after the input channel value changes to False. The valve may be equipped with a weaker cabling as you reduce the constant voltage on the magnet which also reduces the heat release. You can only select a channel with a digital value. See section Modules on page 173. Enter the time for the output to fall from full to zero output. Not available on all module types. The delay on/off properties works as a debouncing filter. Not available on all module types. See section Modules on page 173. you can use soft start. Use the Delay off if you want the digital output to be active for a time after the Input channel is deactivated. Not available on all module types. with a fixed pulse width specified by this property. you can use soft stop. To get a softer activation of an on/off valve function. NOTE The channel value will not be affected if the Input channel is activated/ blocked a shorter time than you have specified for the delay on respective delay off. See section Modules on page 173. With Peak and hold you increase the magnet’s life time. high output. that is. Enter the time for the output to rise from zero to full output. To get a softer deactivation of an on/off valve function.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels Properties Delay on [ms] This is the time it will take for the channel value to change to True after the input channel value changes to True. During peak time the output functions as a normal digital output. After peak time the output will function as a PWM output. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Open load Overload Inherited module status Output is disconnected. Servo out . Its value should be 0% . the output value is 0.Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels < on < off t off on t Channel value Function value Debounce filter for a digital out. Select the channel which will activate this servo output. Integrating regulation constant. where 0% equals min RPM and 100% equals max RPM. If you select “Yes”. Proportional regulation constant.SOUT The servo output channel is primarily used to control an actuator that controls the speed of a diesel engine. the servo output will always be active. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Boolean value. VIN-A on the same module is used as a feedback channel and is therefore occupied. If the enabling channel’s value is False. IQANdesign User manual Enable Type P regulator I regulator 106 . When using closed loop. Closed or open loop. Output is overloaded. See section Inherited module status on page 92.100%. Properties Input channel The input channel is the command value that controls the throttle position. Calibration > Min [mV] Calibration > Max [mV] NOTE The P. IQANdesign User manual 107 .Inputs/Outputs 5 Channels D regulator Calibration > Adjustable Derivative regulation constant. Enter raw sensor value when sensor is in its minimum position. Enter raw sensor value when sensor is in its maximum position. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Command value. % Open loop: 0% to 100% Closed loop: -100% to 100% Analog (Real number) Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. it is possible to adjust its Min and Max via the master display or IQANrun. I and D constants are for historical reasons not normalized as they are on a PID channel. Typically you need greater numbers on an SOUT than you would need on a PID. Property Adjustable must be set to Yes to be able to adjust it. You must also add this channel to an adjust group to be able to adjust it via the master display or IQANrun. Select “Yes” to make this channel adjustable. Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. use the simpler math channel. a MAC is preferable and most common.DMAC These two channel types are identical. Mathematical channels . Properties Unit Limiting object group (Only MAC) The unit for the scaled value of this channel. For functions where you need different limitations depending on direction. where you have operations requiring feedback analysis you will use other channels such as PID. and will thereby be able to limit the channel regardless of its sign. Function selector Function With a DMAC you can create complex functions in both negative and positive direction. If you just want to create simple functions or complex functions in only the positive direction. As unsigned. In a simple application you may use the math channel. for example [%] or [cm]. such as crane end damping. This is especially useful when you have the same limiting objects in both negative and positive direction. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. Dual direction math has two limiting object groups. one for the positive direction and one for the negative. it will copy the sign from the controlling object group.Calculation channels 5 Channels Calculation channels The calculation channels are used to evaluate functions. For more complex systems.MAC and DMAC There are two types of channels that are primarily used to perform mathematical calculations: • Math channel . the limiting object group’s value must have the same sign as the controlling object group’s value to be able to limit the channel value.MAC • Dual direction math channel . When treated as a signed value. IQANdesign User manual 108 . use a dual direction math channel. Otherwise. Explanations of the calculation channel types and uses are found on the following pages. This property determines whether the limiting object group’s value is treated as a signed or unsigned value. internal digital channel and event counter channel. One function for each state will be added to this channel. Select a state channel to use as function selector. except for their limiting object group functionality. memorizing and the integrating limiting channel. it changes output value each time the activating object group changes from False to True. The positive limiting object group is used when the result from the controlling object group is positive. Internal digital channel .Calculation channels 5 Channels The math channel uses a controlling and a limiting object group. Delay off [ms] IQANdesign User manual 109 . Properties Toggle Select “Yes” to make this channel toggling. See property Unit. and vice versa.IDC The internal digital channel is primarily used to perform calculations where the result is either True or False. 7 significant digits Analog (Real number) Object errors See section Propagated object status on page 92. Delay on [ms] This is the time it will take for the channel value to change to True after the function value changes to True. one for the positive direction and one for the negative direction. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated function value. that is. This is the time it will take for the channel value to change to False after the function value changes to False. An internal digital channel has both delay and toggle functionality. Activating object group t Channel value t Toggling. The dual direction math channel uses a controlling and two limiting object groups. The blocking object group has higher priority than the activating group. Then it will not act as a debouncing filter but just as a delay. One function for each state will be added to this channel. NOTE The channel value will not be affected if the function is activated/blocked a shorter time than you have specified for delay on respective delay off. Properties Command channel Select the channel representing the command value. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated function value. see section Status on page 109. Function An internal digital channel uses one activating and one blocking object group. If toggle is used in combination with latching. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Same status values as a math channel. PID regulator . IQANdesign User manual 110 .PID The PID regulator is used to do closed loop control. for example a straight-lift function for a crane. There is an exception to this rule when delay on/off is used in combination with toggle and/or latching function. the toggle function is ignored. The delay on/off properties work as a debouncing filter.Calculation channels 5 Channels Function selector Select a state channel to use as function selector. < on < off Function value t off on Channel value t The channel value will not be affected if the input signal is to short. Integrating regulation constant. Control error Δ = Command value . The regulator is active when the channel value is True. the regulator function will always be active.Feedback value There is no such thing as a perfect regulator. When disabled. If you select “Yes”. in the “correct direction” and thus reduce the control error. Unit is [gain/s]. Proportional regulation constant. The feedback value is the actual value measured at the controlled object and is used as a feedback signal. for example to control a crane swing. Select “Bipolar” when the regulation will be used in both negative and positive direction. Command and Feedback values The command value is the reference value that the regulator tries to follow. for example to control a hydraulic motor. you must select the correct type of regulation. IQANdesign User manual 111 . The control value is the output value from this channel.Calculation channels 5 Channels Feedback channel P regulator I regulator D regulator Enable Select the channel representing the feedback value. There is a risk that a system will experience self-induced oscillation. It is necessary to compromise between the accuracy and stability. Output range Command value + - Control error Regulator Control value Controlled object Feedback value Block diagram over a closed loop control. for example wheel-steering or straight lift. Derivative regulation constant. Select the channel which will activate the regulation. Select “Unipolar” when the regulation only will be used in one direction. With this in mind. the integrating part is reset to 0 and channel value is set to 0. The purpose of that value is to run the controlled object. With proportional regulation only. there is normally an error remaining between the command value and the feedback value when the regulation is completed. ATTENTION Remember that a self-oscillating system can cause unnecessary risk for the people and machine function. the control error. With an integrating part. there is a greater risk of getting an unstable system. you get a more accurate regulation. the value of the current is proportional to the bucket gradient error. Proportional regulation . IQANdesign User manual 112 .Calculation channels 5 Channels Different types of regulation There are three ways of regulate so that the actual value follows the command value with the least control error possible. which measures the bucket’s gradient. Integrating regulation . you increase the P constant until the system has a tendency to self-oscillate and then reduce the value a bit.P The control value UT is affected proportionally to deviations between the command value and the feedback value. which is often sufficient for such a function. you can solve this with a P regulator. UT = PxΔT The control error Δ is measured at every point in time T and multiplied with a constant P so that the control value UT is changed proportionally with the size of the control error. When you use the P regulator. however. To measure the feedback value. When you theoretically trim a P regulator. ΔT. EXAMPLE To regulate the bucket on a wheel loader.I (t = T) UT = Ix (t = 0) ∫ ° ΔT At the time T. use an inclinometer or angle sensor. With an integrating regulation. an error usually remains when the regulation is finished. is added with previously measured control errors and then multiplied with a constant I. With proportional regulation. When the machine lifts a container. The feedback value is suddenly changed which the regulator must compensate for. we use a PI regulator where the integrating action is required so an error does not remain when the boom reaches its upper end. When the straight lift function is activated. The command value = COG just before the start of the regulation + Feedback value = COG Command value Control error PI Regulator Control value Telescope Block diagram of the control system for the straight lift function. there is a button to press when you want to use the straight lift function. On the lever used to maneuver the boom. the COG (center of gravity = the distance between the front wheels’ centre to the middle of the load). “disturbances” in the regulation. UT = Dx(ΔT – Δ(T – 1)) IQANdesign User manual 113 . This feature is called anti-windup. you must compromise between the degree of accuracy and stability. When the button is pressed.Calculation channels 5 Channels Here.D The derivative regulation is not used often. is held constant. called PI regulation. You often use both proportional and integrating actions simultaneously. It is used to prevent fast changes. if the wheels in a closed loop are loaded less than normal which makes the control of the angle faster. the value of COG is stored so that if can be used as the command value for the regulator. instead the regulator controls the telescope in and out. for example. To get the COG constant. For this you use a PI regulator to regulate the telescope function. NOTE The value of a PID channel is not allowed to exceed 100% (or -100% respectively for bipolar regulators). you cannot maneuver the telescope with the lever. EXAMPLE The straight lift function for a crane. When the boom angle increases. Derivative regulation . Therefor the integrating part can be temporarily disabled by the regulator to ensure channel value stays within range. the telescope is extended so that the COG will be constant. For more information on the different control techniques. see above. Start with the P constant. The ILC will then be used as a limiting object in a function. The functionality of this channel could be compared to a PID regulator that only uses the I-part. this is compensated for. the following applies: (t = T) UT = PxΔT + I ° ΔT – Dx(ΔT – Δ(T – 1)) ∫ (t = 0) The simplest way to trim a regulator in practice. and where the I-part varies depending on the value of the input channel. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated control value.ILC The integrating limiting channel is typically used for power regulation or max regulation. we have to refer to literature on the subject. IQANdesign User manual 114 . If the difference between the control error is to great. is by testing. The derivative action is used together with proportional regulation. Supplement with an I constant if necessary. to control the power or vehicle speed so that it does not exceed its limits.Calculation channels 5 Channels The control error at time T is compared with the control error in the previous measure and also multiplied with a constant D. that is. For a PID regulator. Integrating limiting channel . called PD regulation. It is also possible to equip a PI regulator with the D action which will then be a PID regulator. % Unipolar: 0% to 100% Bipolar: -100% to 100% Analog (Real number) Out of range Invalid P or I regulator constant (less than 0). If the input channel’s value is above the start reduction value. Select the channel which will activate the regulation. If the input channel’s value is below the start reduction value the output value will increase proportionally to the error value. The channel’s output value is 0 . When disabled. where the idle value is 100%. If you select “Yes”. The value of the input channel where the reduction will start. Input channel Start reduction at (S) Max error (E) Max increase speed [%/s] (Y2) Max decrease speed [%/s] Maximum decrease speed when input value is greater (Y1) than “Start reduction at” + “Max error” (S + E). the regulator function will always be active. Properties Output Enable Specify “Normal” or “Inverted” regulation.100%. the decrease speed is proportional to the error value. The regulator is active when the channel value is True. Maximum increase speed when input value is less than “Start reduction at” . IQANdesign User manual 115 .E). the output value will decrease linearly with the Max decrease speed.“Max error” (S . Specify the maximum error relative to the value “Start reduction at”.Calculation channels 5 Channels S Y2 Y1 E E Integrating limiting function. the integrating part is reset to 0 and channel value is set to 0 (or 100 for "Inverted" regulation). Select an input channel for the regulation. that is. ECNT This channel is used to count events. % 0% to 100% Analog (Real number) No further status values except the standard statuses. every time a condition becomes true. Finally we will use this channel as a limiting object for a MAC that controls the servo output.Calculation channels 5 Channels EXAMPLE Controlling the diesel engine of a vehicle. • Input channel= Vehicle speed • Start reduction at (S) = 4100 RPM • Max error (E) = 200 • Max increase speed [%/s] (Y2) = 10 • Max decrease speed [%/s] (Y2) = 20 The output value of this channel will decrease when the vehicle speed exceeds 4100 RPM. If it exceeds the 4300 RPM the output will decrease with the speed of 20%/second. And finally when the vehicle speed goes below 4100 RPM the output value will start to increase again. Event counter . Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated control value. When the vehicle speed is exactly 4100 RPM the output value will be stable at its latest value. The resetting objects have the highest priority. The event counter channel counts on rising edge. If so. You can increase. for example how many times a specified condition has been fulfilled. The maximum speed of the transmission should not exceed 4100 RPM. see above. decrease or reset the channel value. we should decrease the position of the gas actuator. to achieve the max speed function. Disabled and OK. IQANdesign User manual 116 . Reset value will be used when channel is reset. When the resetting object group switches from False to True. Function An event counter has increasing. T1. decreasing and resetting the event counter’s output value. T2 > two times cycle time T1 T2 t Decreasing object group’s value t Resetting object group’s value t Counter’s output value t Increasing object group’s value Increasing. As long as the resetting object group is True. Property Store value must be set to Yes to be able to adjust it.Calculation channels 5 Channels Properties Store value The value is stored in non-volatile memory so that it is preserved during power off. the channel value is reset to the value defined by property Reset value. the counter is not affected by the increasing or decreasing object group. This is valid also when an object group turns True because of a state change. the channel will be set to this value. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. Will also make it possible to use this channel in an adjust group. The counter is incremented (or decremented) when the increasing (or decreasing) object group switches from False to True. it is possible to adjust its value with IQANrun. IQANdesign User manual 117 . One function for each state will be added to this channel. At start-up and when reset by its function or via an adjust item. Reset value Function selector Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. Select a state channel to use as function selector. decreasing and resetting object groups. The resetting object group has the highest priority. see above. that is. Select a state channel to use as function selector. Memorizing channel . Select “Replace” to replace the memorized value with the input channel’s value. Specify what action you want when a memorize is triggered. when the function value for this channel changes from False to True.MEM This channel is used to memorize.Calculation channels 5 Channels Value Value Unit Range Type Status Accumulated counter value. One function for each state will be added to this channel. accumulate or subtract the value of a defined input signal at a certain condition. Select “Subtract” to subtract the input channel’s value from the memorized value.9999999 Analog (Integer number) Calculation overflow Object errors Value not within valid range. At start-up and when reset by its function or via an adjust item. The value is stored in non-volatile memory so that it is preserved during power off. Will also make it possible to use this channel in an adjust group. Store value Reset value Function selector IQANdesign User manual 118 . Select “Add” to add the input channel’s value to the memorized value. n/a -9999999 . See section Propagated object status on page 92. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. the channel will be set to this value. Properties Input channel Action Select the channel whose value you want to memorize. This is valid also when the object group turns True because of a state change. 7 significant digits Limited range -2×109 . Analog (Real number) Type IQANdesign User manual 119 . Same as input channel. when the value switches from False to True.2×109 when using Add or Subtract. The resetting object group has the highest priority. Reset value will be used when channel is reset. Activating object group’s value T1 T2 t Resetting object group’s value t Input channel’s value t Channel’s output value t Memorizing channel with Action set to Add. The channel value is updated using the selected Action when the activating object group switches from False to True. Value Value Unit Range Memorized value. it is possible to adjust its value with IQANrun. As long as the resetting object group is True. that is. When the resetting object group switches from False to True. NOTE The Memorizing channel “memorizes” on rising edge. the channel value is reset to the value defined by property Reset value. Property Store value must be set to Yes to be able to adjust it. the channel is not affected by the activating object group. Function A memorizing channel uses two object groups: activating and resetting.Calculation channels 5 Channels Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. for positive and negative direction. The bandwidth limit will decrease linearly with smaller changes.SFC The slope/filter channel is used to apply slope times. filter or moving average to another channel. the bandwidth will also be zero. Band Width Limiting. and 100 equals maximum filter effect. in [unit]/s. Select the channel which will activate the filtering. Type Slopes BWL Filter Window size IQANdesign User manual 120 . This is the number of samples used for calculating the average. no bandwidth limitation will be used. it is not filtered at all. (-2×109 > Result > 2×109). such as joystick control for a crane function. which is then used as the channel value. BWL. When the signal change is larger than the window. If this channel’s value is False. See section Propagated object status on page 92. If you select “Yes”. Specify a window size for the moving average filter. When the change of the signal is zero. 0 equals no filter effect at all. Specify a filter value for this channel. This function is particularly good to use for signals that are “nervous” but where a normal filter would decrease the overall dynamics of the signal. the output value equals the value of the input channel. Select type “Slopes”. that is. filter or moving average to. “Filter” or “Moving average”. Properties Input channel Enable Select the input channel that you want to apply slope times. Slope/Filter channel . BWL. This function will decrease the frequency bandwidth of the output signal whenever the change of the output signal is smaller than BWL window. the filtering will always be active. Enter start and stop slope values.Calculation channels 5 Channels Status Calculation overflow Object errors Invalid result when using action Add or Subtract. “BWL”. 3 0. Input Value [Unit] Output 100 25% 50% 75% 90% 0 0. where the filter value is decided by the size of the signal change.1 0. Value [Unit] Input Output Stop slope Start slope Time [s] Step response for analog input signal when using start and stop slopes. IQANdesign User manual 121 . Start slope specifies maximum changing speed for increasing values and stop slope for decreasing values. BWL Type BWL is a variable version of SFC type Filter. Start and stop slopes are defined in Unit/s where Unit is the input channel’s unit.4 0. The changing speed for increasing and decreasing value can be set independently. see above.5 Time [s] Approximate step response for analog input signal at 50 ms cycle time. four different filter values. Filter Type Filter is a fast and simple filter that can be used to attain greater stability in the channel’s signal.2 0.Calculation channels 5 Channels Slopes With slopes you can state the maximum changing speed of the signal. For example: If the input signal changes from 20% to 24% between two system samples. Butterworth filter channel . Only applicable when these properties are controlled by a channel. Since the signal change is larger than the BWL value. the signal change is 4%. high pass. the signal change is 30%. All input value changes smaller than 20% will now be filtered. To filter out small changes in the input value we use a BWL value of 20%. which means no filtering at all.Calculation channels 5 Channels Filter value 100 Signal change 0 BWL Filter value as a function of input signal change. Analog (Real number) Calculation overflow Out of range Calculation result too large. Invalid slope time (negative). Same as input channel. The channel is then filtered using SFC type Filter with a filter value of 80%. EXAMPLE Input channel is a lever signal (0 to 100%).BFW The Butterworth filter channel is used to apply a low pass. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Filtered value. 4% signal change gives us a filter value of 80%. BWL value is defined in the same unit as the input channel’s unit. band pass or band stop filter to another channel. the filter value is 0%. IQANdesign User manual 122 . If the input signal instead changes from 20% to 50%. or 0 > Filter > 100. with smaller changes giving more filter effect. Same as input channel. or 0 > BWL > 100. For band pass and band stop. “Band pass” or “Band stop”. For low pass and high pass. the number of poles is twice the order. see previous property. Band pass and band stop filters have two cutoff frequencies. The first frequency must be smaller than the second. 0 < Cutoff frequency < 1/(2*System cycle time). that is. If this channel’s value is False. Analog (Real number) Calculation overflow Calculation result too large. Same as input channel. this is the number of poles. “High pass”. Second cutoff frequency [Hz] The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the magnitude of the response is -3 dB.Calculation channels 5 Channels Properties Input channel Enable Select the input channel that you want to apply a Butterworth filter to. IQANdesign User manual 123 . It must be greater than 0 and smaller than half the system sample frequency. It must be greater than 0 and smaller than half the system sample frequency. the output value equals the value of the input channel. the filtering will always be active. The first frequency must be smaller than the second. 0 < Cutoff frequency < 1/(2*System cycle time). Band pass and band stop filters have two cutoff frequencies. see next property. it is not filtered at all. Same as input channel. If you select “Yes”. Select type “Low pass”. Enter the desired order of this filter. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Filtered value. Select the channel which will activate the filtering. Type Order First cutoff frequency [Hz] The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the magnitude of the response is -3 dB. If the row and/or column selector does not match a specific row/column the output value will be interpolated or selected from the closest cell depending on configuration. The values are edited using a special dialog (see below). A two dimensional array of values defining row and column indices as well as output values of the channel. The column selector is used to select which column that the channel's value shall be taken from. This dialog is opened by clicking the button next to the lookup table property. When interpolation is enabled the channel value will be determined by using bilinear interpolation. Column selector Interpolation Lookup table The lookup table values are edited using a special editor dialog. It is also possible to paste values to the table from e. This property defines the behavior of the channel when the row and/or column selector does not match a row/ column index value of the table. This may be a channel or a constant value. The column indices is entered in the first row and the row indices in the first column. Lookup table channel . Properties Unit Row selector Unit of the lookup table output value. otherwise the closest defined value will be used. IQANdesign User manual 124 . The rest of the grid is used to enter the output values of the channel corresponding to the row and column selector values. The values can be exported and imported using semicolon delimited text files.g.LTC The lookup table channel provides a two dimensional array with a row and column selector channels to select the channel output value.Calculation channels 5 Channels Out of range Invalid cutoff frequency. This may be a channel or a constant value. spreadsheet programs. The row selector is used to select which row that the channel's value shall be taken from. 7 significant digits Analog (Real number) Calculation overflow Out of range Calculation result too large. See property Unit. Row or column input value is outside the range defined by row or column index. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated value. IQANdesign User manual 125 .Calculation channels 5 Channels Lookup table editor dialog. Function parameter .FP The function parameter channel is used as an adjustable constant in functions. you often need to change or adapt a lot of values during a test. system and module diagnostics. For this you can use function parameters. See property Input type. for example a crane function group may need a joystick position from its parent group.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Miscellaneous channels The channel types in this chapter have no common denominator such as the Inputs/Outputs or the Calculation channels. Another example of when it is a good idea to use function parameters is when several functions or objects refer to the same parameter. IQANdesign User manual 126 . Inherits the status from the input channel (if applicable) when not out of range. See properties Min limit and Max limit. See property Unit. You can adjust the function parameter value via the master display or IQANrun.FGI The function group input channel is used to bring values into a function group from its parent group. see section Function group input on page 58. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Same as input’s value. For example. Out of range Input channel’s status Input value is outside the range defined. you may need to adapt the PID parameters during tuning of the control loop or perhaps change the limit values for an object. For further information about this channel type. pressure limit. Function group input . etc. Each function group input can be protected with input type and min/max limits. Under the Miscellaneous tab you will for instance find channels for multifunction. for example a max or min limit. Then you only have to change the value in one place and the values will automatically be updated wherever you have used the function parameter. When you develop an application for a machine. for example max speed. you will be able to have as many different parameter value as the number of states that are specified in the state channel. Maximum value allowed for this channel value. One mode for each state will be added to this channel. You must also add this channel to an “Adjust group” to be able to adjust it via the master display or IQANrun. Select “Yes” to make this mode adjustable. You can have more than one mode for this channel. it is possible to adjust its value via the master display or IQANrun. Mode selector It is possible to have several values for a Function parameter. Property Adjustable must be set to Yes to be able to adjust it. A mode is a set of properties. see property “Mode selector”. See property Unit. The first mode is the default mode and it is always available. Select a state channel to use as mode selector. Specify how much the value should increase/decrease for each step the jog-shuttle is turned.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Properties Unit Min Max Step size The unit for the scaled value of this channel. A mode is a set of properties. Minimum value allowed for this channel value. When the jogshuttle is turned rapidly. If you select to use a state channel as a selector of the different FP values. Mode selector Default mode Default value Adjustable Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. or value set by user if adjustable. The mode to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. If you don’t specify a mode selector. Analog (Real or Hexadecimal number) IQANdesign User manual 127 . Value Value Unit Range Type Fixed value. The default value for this mode. this is the only mode. a larger step size will be used. See properties Min and Max. To rename a state. The default state is the active state when no other state is active. the active state is the default state. Functions are calculated in consecutive order. which corresponds to value 0. If no function is True. except for the default state. that is. except for function group input channels which have to be updated manually (see section Function group input . Each function is calculated using one activating and one blocking object group. see above. the active state. Drag its function (state) tab and drop it on the tab where you want it. When an activating object group for a state’s function is latched (by using one of the latching object group methods).Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Status No further status values except the standard statuses. If you need to rearrange your states. it can be released by either the blocking object group in the same function or a preceding state’s function going true. State IQANdesign User manual 128 . State machine channel . select its tab in the function inspector and enter a name in the property inspector. Add states by right-clicking on the function tabs in the function inspector and select Add State in the popup menu. Disabled and OK.FGI on page 126 for more information). The first state with function value = True. all components using that state machine will be updated with the new state names or order. Each state has its own function to decide which state should be active. decides the value of the state machine. The first function that evaluates to True. becomes the active state. When states are renamed or rearranged. you can move a state to another position. Properties Default state name This name is used for the default state. or active function for a math channel. for example active mode for a current output. Each function also has a description property. Value Value Unit Range Type Calculated state. You can add as many states as you like to your state machine.SMC The state machine channel is used to select the active state for a multi-state component. n/a One of the available states. Function A state machine has one function for each state. State IQANdesign User manual 129 . The states can be selected from the adjust menu in the master or controlled by another channel. for example an event counter or a math channel. State parameter . it is possible to adjust its active state via the master display or IQANrun. 2. Press the “+” button to add states to the state machine. Value Value Unit Range Type Active state controlled by input channel. Property Input channel must be set to Adjustable to be able to adjust it. which means the user can control the active state by setting the value of this channel. Drop it on the state property where you want to insert it. or state selected by user if adjustable. Properties Input channel Select a channel to control the active state. or select “Adjustable” and add this channel to an adjust group to control the state manually via the master display or IQANrun.SP State parameter is an adjustable state machine. Enter a descriptive name for each state. This name is used for the default state. Rearrange states You can move a state by dragging its property name in the property inspector. When states are renamed or rearranged. all components using that state parameter will be updated with the new state names or order. n/a One of the available states. etc.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Status Object errors See section Propagated object status on page 92. Default state name States State 1. The default state is the active state when no other state is active. Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. 00 V.45 V. Range: 0 . Different modules have different diagnostic values that can be measured. Only applicable for J1939 modules. for example 45.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Status Out of range Input value is outside the range defined by the states. To change the value that is measured just move the channel to the corresponding “pin” in the module view. for example 64 = “OK” or 203 = “No contact”. drag it to the module in the application manager or create it directly in the module view by right-clicking on one of the module diagnostic “pins” and select Add channel. To assign a module diagnostic channel to a module.7 Type: Analog (Integer number) J1939 lamp indicator.255 Type: Analog (Integer number) Module serial number. Diagnostic values Module status Current status of module. Range: -1 . This channel can be used as an input to another channel or object. Type: Analog (Real number) The module’s id tag value (CAN address). for example 5. Type: Digital S/N Temperature [°C] +BAT [V] VREF [V] Address Malfunction/Red stop/ Amber warning/Protect Module status values 0 Not evaluated IQANdesign User manual 130 . See module status value table below. False=Off and True=On. Type: Analog (Real number) The module’s reference voltage.MDGN The module diagnostic channel is used to measure different module related values. (-1 = Unknown address). for example 28. 0 or higher. Type: Analog (Real number) The module’s supply voltage. Temperature and Module status. such as Supply voltage. Module diagnostics . Type: Text The module’s internal temperature.70 °C. See table Diagnostic values above.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels 64 128 129 130 131 203 204 205 Value OK High temperature Low supply voltage High supply voltage RTC not connected No contact Multiple address VREF error Value Unit Range Type Status Value is set to diagnostic value from actual module. System input . Measured value is +BAT [V]. Measured value is Address. Properties Type Select which type of input to control with this channel.SYSIN The system input channel is used to set different system values. such as backlight and display buttons. IQANdesign User manual 131 . Measured value is Address. High temperature Low supply voltage High supply voltage Multiple address Address error VREF error Inherited module status Measured value is Temperature [°C]. See table Diagnostic values above. See table Diagnostic values above. Measured value is +BAT [V]. Measured value is VREF [V]. See section Inherited module status on page 92. Depends on which value is measured. such as Utilization. IQANdesign User manual 132 .SYSOUT The system diagnostic channel is used to measure different system related values. Controls the back button. Value Unit Range Type Status Input channel’s value. Controls the buttons A-D (only available on the MDL master module). Same as input channel.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Input channel Enabled Override Select a channel to control the value of this system input. Same as input channel. Value. No further status values except the standard statuses. Controls the OK button on the MD3 and the jog button on MDL. Controls the menu button. which specifies the value this channel will represent. States if the system input channel should override the default input or if they should work in parallel. Enables or disables this system input. Controls the buttons F1-F5 (on the MD3 master module only F1-F4 are available) Controls the up and down buttons on the MD3 and the corresponding jog functions on the MDL. Weekday and Modem status. System output . There is only one property. Type constants Backlight Button A-D Button F1-F5 Button up/down Button OK Button menu Button back Value Controls the backlight. Note that the backlight system input will always override the internal backlight function when it is enabled. Same as input channel. Disabled and OK. If this value is close to or above 100% you need to increase the system cycle time. If this value is close to or above the actual RAM size of the master module. If this value is close to or above 100% you need to decrease the size of your application by removing some components. see master module properties. Actual RAM size can be found in the master module's data sheet. This is the same value as you set in the master module properties. you need to decrease the size of your application by removing some components. Estimated memory utilization can be displayed at design time in IQANdesign with the help of application statistics.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Value constants Cycle utilization [%] Measures utilization of the master processor. Type: Analog (Integer number) Measures utilization of the internal RAM memory. When above 100%. Type: Analog (Real number) Measures utilization of the internal RAM memory. how much space is occupied. When value is above 80% the channel’s status will be High alarm. Type: Analog (Real number) Measures the system cycle time. Type: Analog (Real number) 0 = Not present 1 = OK 2 = Memory almost full 3 = Full 4 = Error 5 = Init 6 = Memory check Type: Analog (Integer number) Cycle time [ms] Memory utilization [%] Memory utilization [KBytes] Log memory status IQANdesign User manual 133 . status will be High error. that is. When value is above 85% the channel’s status will be High alarm. how much time of each system cycle the processor is busy. that is. how much space is occupied. that is. When used as a numerical value in a function or property.25.100%.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels System status 0 = System OK 1 = There are one or more alarms active (not acknowledged) 2 = There are one or more errors active (not acknowledged) Type: Analog (Integer number) 1 = Monday and 7 = Sunday (ISO 8601-compliant). Type: Analog (Real number) 0 = Unavailable 1 = Initializing 2 = Searching 3 = Idle 4 = Calling 5 = Line is open 6 = PIN code error 7 = No SIM card Type: Analog (Integer number) Weekday (1=Monday 7=Sunday) Date Time Modem status Modem signal quality [%] 0 . etc. Type: Analog (Integer number) Today’s date. When used as a numerical value in a function or property. 1 = first language selected. 0% = no signal. Type: Analog (Integer number) Index for the display page that is currently displayed on the master display. Type: Digital 0 = default language selected. See also property “Time format” on “Display pages”. False = not available. Type: Analog (Integer number) The actual time. True = available. Each display page index can be found in the display page list. See also property “Date format” on “Display pages”. for example 18. Type: Analog (Integer number) SMS available SMS (Short Message Service) availability. 100% = best signal quality. Type: Analog (Integer number) Selected language Active display page IQANdesign User manual 134 . Example: 18:15:00 (a quarter past six). its value is hours elapsed since midnight. column “Order”. Example: 2004-08-27. its value is the number of days that have passed since 1899-12-30. Type: Text Unique id for each machine. It can never be negative.TMR The timer channel is used for timekeeping. delays. decrease or be reset. Type: Text The access level of the currently logged in user. 0 is the smallest valid value. Used for value Cycle utilization.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Application name Application version Application id Machine id User name User level User tag The name of this application. The timer’s value can either increase. See table Value constants above. Minutes [min] or Hours [h]. See table Value constants above. The timer starts to “count” when its function becomes True. Timer . etc. Type: Text The name of the currently logged in user. The internal resolution is the same as the cycle time (pre-set to 50 ms). Type: Analog (Integer number) The tag of the currently logged in user. See table Value constants above. hour counters. Type: Analog (Integer number) Value Value Unit Range Type Status Value is set to selected diagnostic value from system. Seconds [s]. IQANdesign User manual 135 . Type: Text The version for this application. High alarm High error Used for values Cycle utilization and Memory utilization. usually set in production. You can choose to present the value as Milliseconds [ms]. Type: Text The id for this application. “Minutes” or “Hours”. 7 significant digits Milliseconds: 0 . “Milliseconds”. See section Propagated object status on page 92. Value Value Unit Range Elapsed time. Property Store value must be set to Yes and property Type must be set to Hours to be able to adjust it. At start-up and when reset by its function or via an adjust item. “Seconds”.555 555. Function A timer uses increasing.2×106 Minutes: 0 . See property Type (Unit). One function for each state will be added to this channel. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel.33 333 333 Hours: 0 .2×109 Seconds: 0 . the channel will be set to this value. The value is stored in non-volatile memory so that it is preserved during power off. The resetting object group has the highest priority and the decreasing object group has higher priority then the increasing object group. decreasing and resetting object groups. Select a state channel to use as function selector.Miscellaneous channels 5 Channels Properties Type (Unit) Store value Select the resolution of your timer. Will also make it possible to use this channel in an adjust group. Reset value Function selector Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. it is possible to adjust its value with IQANrun.6 Analog (Real number) Type Status Calculation overflow Object errors Calculation result too large. Reset value will be used when channel is reset. IQANdesign User manual 136 . which means the text can be changed by the user from the master display or IQANrun. For example. Select “Yes” to make this mode adjustable. One mode for each state will be added to this channel. A mode is a set of properties. n/a 1 . Select a state channel to use as mode selector. acknowledging the messages. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Fixed text. A text parameter can have multiple texts. the machine can send service messages to home base or receive messages that adjust some specific parameter. The default text. it is possible to adjust its value via the master display or IQANrun. With a GSM modem you are able to send and receive SMS messages. IQANdesign User manual 137 . Properties Max Mode selector Maximum number of characters.Interface channels 5 Channels Interface channels The channels in this chapter are used to present information and to interact with the operator or other personnel.15 characters Text No further status values except the standard statuses. The mode to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. Disabled and OK. There are channels for showing different types of messages on the master display.TP The text parameter channel has adjustable text. Property Adjustable must be set to Yes for each mode you want to adjust. Text parameter . Some messages are interactive and the action depends on how the operator interacts. Text Adjustable Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. The active text is then selected with a state channel. or text set by user if adjustable. You must also add this channel to an “Adjust group” to be able to adjust it via the master display or IQANrun. This means that the underIQANdesign User manual 138 . The texts added here are all concatenated to produce this channel’s value. as opposed to a display page which always fills the entire screen. Blue”. this channel’s value will be “Red. Green. “Unit” or “Name and unit”. This channel’s value will then be “Temp = 20. Example: “Text 1” is “Temp = ” and “Text 2” is the value of a voltage input measuring temperature. You can select “Value”. If you select a channel you also need to specify what information to show. see property “Texts”. see property “Show”. “Name”. Disabled and OK. Enter a text or select a channel. etc.Interface channels 5 Channels Text formatting channel . Properties Delimiter Enter a text here to use as delimiter between each text added below. logged or presented on the display. The dialog box window is smaller than the total screen size. “Text 2” is “Green” and “Text 3” is “Blue”. Example: “Text 1” is “Red”. Specify how many decimals you want. If delimiter is “. Example: Channel is named “Temperature” with unit “°C” and value 25.TFC The text formatting channel is used to create a formatted text that can be sent as SMS. Specify what type of information to show. n/a 150 characters Text No further status values except the standard statuses. Conditional message . for example a warning indicating overload.CMSG The conditional message channel is used to show a dialog box on the master display in different situations.2. Texts Text Show Number of decimals Value Value Unit Range Type Status Formatted text. The dialog box is displayed in a window on top of the normal display pages. ” (a comma and a space).2”. “Name and unit” will show “Temperature [°C]”.3”. “Value” will show “25. Dialog boxes with higher priority is always shown before dialog boxes with lower priority. Header IQANdesign User manual 139 . The dialog levels from low to high priority are as follows: • Message • Information • Confirmation • Warning • Alarm • Error • Critical NOTE System generated dialog boxes uses types Message. Enter a header for your dialog. Alarm and Error. “Alarm” and “Error”. “Message” has the lowest priority and “Critical” has the highest. The dialog types are prioritized in a certain order: Message has the lowest priority and Critical has the highest. System generated messages use types “Message”. and instead used for controlling the dialog box as long as it is visible. Properties Dialog type Select a dialog type. All display page buttons will be disabled though. Dialogs with higher priority are always shown before dialogs with lower priority. You can also select a text channel to use its value as header.Interface channels 5 Channels lying display page will be visible around the dialog box. Alarm message. All types have their own icon and header so the user can easily recognize the type of dialog box when it pops up on the master display. There are seven types of dialog boxes that can be shown. The dialog type decides the priority level. Interface channels 5 Channels Text Channel Help Enter a text. not level triggered. Select a state channel to use as function selector. NOTE The showing and hiding is only edge triggered. Select a channel that you want displayed together with your message. Example: If the active state changes and the showing object group of the new active state is true. You can also select a text channel to use its value as help text. Dialog box visibility is also triggered by state changes that causes the showing object group to turn true. hiding will have higher priority and the message will not be displayed. Value Value Function value. The dialog box is shown when the showing object group turns True. One function for each state will be added to this channel. This means that even if the hiding object group is true. or until the hiding object group turns True. If both showing and hiding object groups turns True at the same time. Function selector Function The conditional message channel has two object groups. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital IQANdesign User manual Unit Range Type 140 . One for showing the dialog box and one for hiding it. You can also select a text channel to use its value as text. The user can read this text by pressing the help button. When the showing object group goes True the channel value is set to 1 (Active). The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. It will be visible until the user acknowledges it by pressing OK. Channel name and value will be shown. Enter a descriptive text for this message. the dialog box will be triggered to be displayed. When the hiding object group goes True the channel value is set to 0 (Inactive). the message will be displayed when the showing object group switches from False to True. The hiding object group has higher priority than the showing object group. “Alarm” and “Error”.IMSG The interactive message channel is used to interact with the driver. Interactive message . This button will be the help button. Select a channel that you want displayed together with your message. Enter a header for your dialog. See section Conditional message . “Message” has the lowest priority and “Critical” has the highest.CMSG on page 138 for more information. Dialogs with higher priority are always shown before dialogs with lower priority. Or. Center or Right depending on which button the driver pressed to acknowledge the message. You can also select a text channel to use its value as header. One function for each state will be added to this channel. You can also select a text channel to use its value as text. enter an HTML tag that points to the help topic for this message. Enter a text that you want displayed above the button on the master display.Interface channels 5 Channels Status Object errors See section Propagated object status on page 92. Please note that the complete text may not always fit. Header Text Buttons Channel Help Function selector IQANdesign User manual 141 . The channel’s value can be Active or Inactive. The interactive dialog box is displayed in a window on top of the normal display pages. you cannot use button “Right”. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. Enter a descriptive text for this message. Select a state channel to use as function selector. The dialog type decides the priority level. Channel name and value will be shown. but also Left. The user can read this text by pressing the help button. Enter a text. Properties Dialog type Select a dialog type. System generated messages use types “Message”. If you specify help for this message. It is similar to the conditional message channel (CMSG). You can also select a text channel to use its value as help text. Value Value When the showing object group goes True the channel value is 1 (Active) until the user presses a button. PIN code channel . logs or display pages. n/a 0 (Inactive) 1 (Active) 2 (Left) 3 (Center) 4 (Right) 5 (ESC) The dialog box is not visible The dialog box is visible User pressed the left button User pressed the center button User pressed the right button User pressed the ESC button Unit Range Type Status Analog (Integer number) Object errors See section Propagated object status on page 92. The channel value will then correspond to the pressed button until the hiding object group goes True which will set the channel value to 0 (Inactive). It is an interactive channel that provides a dialog box for entering a PIN code. IQANdesign User manual 142 . measure groups. It is placed on top of all other dialog boxes visible at the same time (except for some rare system messages). such as adjust groups. The dialog box is displayed in the same way as a conditional message (CMSG) dialog box.PCC The PIN code channel is used to protect other parts of your application.Interface channels 5 Channels Function The interactive message channel has the same type of object groups as the conditional message channel. PIN code channel dialog box. and instead shows the message “PIN code has already been entered”. there is no need to enter the PIN code again. You can also select a text channel to use its value as text. not level triggered. Select a state channel to use as function selector.Interface channels 5 Channels Properties Header Text PIN code Enter a header for your dialog. It will be visible until the user enters the correct PIN code or presses Cancel. Select “Yes” to make the PIN code for this channel adjustable. Therefor the dialog box will not allow PIN code entering. When the correct PIN code has been entered the channel value goes True. Value Value When the correct PIN code has been entered the channel value goes True. You must also add this channel to an adjust group to be able to adjust it via the master display or IQANrun. Adjustable Function selector Function The PIN code channel has two object groups. Enter a text. One function for each state will be added to this channel. One for showing the dialog box and one for resetting its value. As long as the channel value is True. Enter the PIN code that the user has to enter to unlock the components protected by this channel. It stays True until power off or the resetting object group goes True. A PIN code is always four digits. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital IQANdesign User manual Unit Range Type 143 . NOTE The showing and resetting object groups are edge triggered. The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. The dialog box is shown when the showing object group turns True. It stays True until power off or the resetting object group goes True. You can also select a text channel to use its value as header. for example 0472. its dialog box will be shown when the corresponding adjust group or log is selected on the master display. After the correct PIN code has been entered. If none are specified. the PIN code channel value turns True and the adjust group and/or log is unlocked and displayed. add them here. descriptive command and/or password. SMS in . The text is case sensitive. It can be used as a variable name. Such PIN code channels don’t need a showing function.Interface channels 5 Channels Status Object errors Adjust groups and logs See section Propagated object status on page 92. activate some function or just show a text in the application. When using IQANrun. only the PIN code from the PIN code channel is used. it is matched against all SMSIN channels to find the tag that corresponds to that message. This is the user-definable text that has to match the incoming message. An incoming message is handled if its phone number matches one of the numbers specified. any phone number has access. As long as the PIN code channel value is False. The adjust group and/or log stays unlocked until the PIN code channel value turns False (by its resetting object group or at power off). Multiple adjust groups and/or logs can use the same PIN code channel and thereby be unlocked at the same time. When an SMS is received. although they are allowed to have one. Make sure the GSM modem is enabled and operational if you are using this channel. The message is sent from a GSM phone or modem.SMSIN The SMS input channel is used to read values from incoming messages via SMS (Short Message Service). Properties Unit Identification tag The unit for the scaled value of this channel. The SMS input channel can be used if you want to set or change a value. Adjust groups and logs can refer to a PIN code channel instead of defining their own PIN code. Phone numbers IQANdesign User manual 144 . not the header and text. To allow access from only some specified phone numbers. If you don’t want a reply to be sent. Property Type must be set to Analog or Text to be able to adjust it. Its value is False until a message is received that matches property “Identification tag”. Enter a text or select a channel to use as reply text. Its value is set from an incoming message and the syntax to set it is “<Identification tag>=<Value>”.Interface channels 5 Channels Phone number Phone numbers are matched backwards. The default value for this channel. Text: Makes this a text channel. Digital pulse: Makes this a digital value channel. Example: “709474416” will match phone numbers +46709474416 (international) or 0709474416 (local). Example: “Name=Mike” will set the value to “Mike” if the property “Identification tag” equals “Name”. Value Analog Digital pulse Text IQANdesign User manual 145 . select “Not used”. Analog: Makes this an analog value channel. Please specify unit. Adjust By adding this channel to an adjust group. Its value is set from an incoming message and the syntax to set it is “<Identification tag>=<Value>”. Example: “Max=50” will set the value to 50 if the property “Identification tag” equals “Max”. Then its value is True for one cycle (see “Cycle time” on master module). that is. Please specify max number of characters for value and a default value as well. Select “Default” to send a default acknowledgement. you can choose not to specify country code and/or area code. min/max limits and default value as well. Type Min Max Default value Reply Minimum value allowed for this channel value. A reply is sent back to the sender when message has been handled. it is also possible to adjust its value via IQANrun. Maximum value allowed for this channel value. etc. Use the + sign and country code to make international calls. for example +46709474416.SMSOUT The SMS output channel is used to send messages via SMS (Short Message Service) to external systems/GSM phones. and the channel will then try to send the message. Select a state channel to use as function selector. Enter a phone number to send message to. Disabled and OK. One function for each state will be added to this channel. signal quality.Interface channels 5 Channels Value Unit Range Type Value is set from incoming SMS that matches the Identification tag. Properties Store value Phone numbers Phone number The value is stored in non-volatile memory so that it is preserved during power off. The blocking object group has the highest priority. The time the channel stays True depends on the network operator. The SMS out value goes True on rising edge. the value goes False again. After it has been sent. Outgoing message Function selector Function This channel uses one activating and one blocking object group. when the function value switches from false to true. or select a text channel. Enter a text that you want to be sent. The channel value will remain True until the message has been sent. IQANdesign User manual 146 . SMS out . The active function is then decided by the value of the state channel. See property Unit n/a n/a 31 characters Text See properties Min False (= 0) and and Max True (= 1) Analog (Real number) Digital Status No further status values except the standard statuses. Make sure the GSM modem is enabled and operational if you are using this channel. Add the phone numbers that you want to send this message to. that is. VDIN The virtual digital input channel is connected to a button on the master display and can be used as a normal digital input. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Object errors See section Propagated object status on page 92. The value is stored in non-volatile memory so that it is preserved during power off. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Sending message. Virtual digital in . see above. it changes output value on each input activation (controlling display button is pressed). Properties Toggle Select “Yes” to make this channel toggling. When the resetting channel’s value changes from False to True. Resetting channel Store value NOTE Store value is only applicable when Toggle is set to Yes. Therefor virtual digital inputs should not be used to control any critical features. IQANdesign User manual 147 . Select a channel to reset the value. the value of this channel is reset to False. NOTE If system cycle utilization is high. it will not trigger a second message. that is. Otherwise the message will not be sent if you temporarily are out of coverage and shut off the power. see section Display buttons on page 248.Interface channels 5 Channels NOTE If the function goes true once more before the first SMS has been sent. the processing of the display buttons may be skipped temporarily. The connection to a master display button is made in a display page component. please set property Store value to Yes. If you want to make sure that the message will be sent. IQANdesign User manual 148 . n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital No further status values except the standard statuses.Interface channels 5 Channels Value Value Unit Range Type Status Boolean value. Disabled and OK. Each diagnostic message also has an FMI. that IQANdesign supports as a unique channel. J1939 messages According to the SAE J1939 specification. Failure Mode Identifier. The Parameter group number is zero. such as priority and PGN. are documented in the SAE J1939 specification or are supplied by the engine manufacturer. The messages are defined in the SAE J1939 specification and they are not supposed to be modified by the manufacturer. Each parameter group has its own Parameter Group Number.Suspect Parameter Number according to the SAE J1939 specification or manufacturer specification. Other parameter group numbers are reserved by the SAE J1939 standard. For example. a number that corresponds to a specific error text. One example is the TSC1 message (Torque/speed control 1). an open protocol where the manufacturer can specify their own messages. PDU stands for Protocol Data Unit.PGIN The parameter group input channel is used to read data from a J1939 parameter group (a PGN). PF (PDU Format) and PS (PDU Specific). you have to attach one or more Parameter in channels to the parameter group input chanIQANdesign User manual 149 . Parameter group in . where both the identification length and data frame length can be defined to match different message protocols. Parameter group numbers 61184 and 65280 through 65535 are reserved for proprietary messages and can be used for your specific J1939 unit. the parameters concerning Engine temperature such as oil and coolant temperature are inserted into one parameter group and sent in one message. PGN.CAN channels 5 Channels CAN channels CAN messages There are two types of CAN messages that IQAN supports: the J1939 message type. Each parameter group is one message on the CAN bus. J1939 Diagnostic There are also messages for diagnostics. all the parameters are organized into specific groups. according to the SAE J1939 standard. To read parameter values such as fuel level or oil temperature. PGN is sometimes specified as two numbers. and Generic CAN. The PGN is then calculated as follows: PGN=PF·256+PS. The properties that you have to fill in. The diagnostic messages are identified by their SPN . The J1939 unit can send error messages to the IQAN system. Generic CAN The Generic CAN message is an open protocol. Each time the channel value changes from False to True. all parameters connected to this parameter group are assigned their “Error value”. such as resolution and offset. select “Not used”. If you don’t care about timeout. Note: This value is often called transmit rate in protocol specifications. When this time has passed. The PGN is then calculated as PF·256+PS. A parameter group works as a frame for all the parameter channels connected to the same PGN number. Specifies the bits that are used for defining page number in a paged protocol. The highest priority is zero and the lowest priority is seven. but “On request”. PF and PS. This channel type contains information that is unique for each parameter value. PGN is sometimes expressed as two numbers. If message is sent automatically. The parameters values represent the data part of the message. The timeout should then be the transmit rate plus some extra time to allow for delays on the CAN bus. Maximum allowed time from last received message or poll request. Should be used for PGN’s that are not sent periodically. select “Not used”. IQANdesign User manual PGN Timeout [ms] Poll trigger Paged protocol > Page mask Paged protocol > Page value Parameters 150 . Specifies the page number for this channel. Select “Not used” if the protocol you are interpreting is not paged.CAN channels 5 Channels nel. Properties Priority An identifier that establishes the arbitration priority of the information communicated. a unique identifier for a parameter group. Example: 0x0F specifies the first four bits of the frame data as page number. Add and define the parameters that are part of this channel (frame). for example (PGN 61444).PIN on page 154 for more input. See section Parameter input . and contains properties that are common for the parameters. Parameter Group Number. Select a channel to use as a trigger to request this message from sender. the message is requested. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Digital pulse for one cycle when parameter group is received.CAN channels 5 Channels Parameter > Channel Parameter > Offset Select the channel that defines this parameter. Alternatively. Click the button to create a new channel. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Timeout Inherited module status Paged protocol Not received within the specified timeout period. Enter the offset within this parameter group. See section Inherited module status on page 92. you can click the button to place it graphically. Paged protocols use multiple CAN frames with the same identifier but different data content. Each frame is identified by a page number in the CAN data. You need to IQANdesign User manual 151 . one 2 bytes long and one 4 bytes long with offsets 17 and 33. EXAMPLE A protocol uses two CAN frames with the same identifier to transmit some values. IQANdesign User manual 152 . both 2 bytes long with offsets 17 and 33. 65280. Set page mask to 0xFFFF on both channels and page value to 1 on the first and 2 on the second. for values 3and 4. Add parameter input You have to add and define the parameters that are part of this channel.CAN channels 5 Channels specify which bits in the frame data are used to identify each page. 6. The first two bytes in each frame data specifies the page number. Add two PIN’s to the first PGIN.) Select the Channel property and click on the + sign on the right side. First CAN frame PGN: 65280 Byte 1and 2: 0x0001 Byte 3and 4: Value 1 Byte 5. or you can add the PIN channels in the traditional way as you add channels to the application and then connect the PIN channels to the PGIN channel. you just have to select the channel. and the page number that matches this channel. Add a PIN in a PGIN To add parameters directly in the PGIN channel. Either you can add the parameter input channels directly in the property inspector for the PGIN channel. for values 1 and 2. 7 and 8: Value 2 Second CAN frame PGN: 65280 Byte 1 and 2: 0x0002 Byte 3 and 4: Value 3 Byte 5 and 6: Value 4 To read these values you need two PGIN channels. both with the same PGN. Add two PIN’s to the second PGIN. (If you have already added the channels in the traditional way. click at the + sign on the right of the Parameters property. Click in grid to select start bit for current parameter. Parameter offset tool. to the right in the Offset property. You can also enter Byte/ Bit offset or Bit offset in respective edit boxes and see the result in the grid.CAN channels 5 Channels Enter a channel name for the parameter. Open the tool by clicking on . Parameter offset tool The parameter offset tool gives you a graphical presentation of how the parameters are allocated in the parameter group. IQANdesign User manual 153 . the channel will use this value as its output value instead of the measured value. 7 significant digits Analog (Real number) IQANdesign User manual 154 . For example. see SAE J1939 specifications.PIN The parameter input channel is used to read a parameter value from a CAN data frame. You have to add one PIN channel for each parameter value that you want to read in the J1939 or generic CAN data frame. for example fuel level or oil temperature. Select “Yes” to enable J1939 error checking. if the connected sensor is broken. Length [bits] J1939 Error check Resolution [per bit] Offset Value Value Unit Range Type Scaled value. Enter scaled value. The error value is used when there is an error situation for this channel. The properties that you have to fill in. for example 1°C/bit or 0. PGN number and transmission rate in the PGIN channel.CAN channels 5 Channels The parameter length is by default 1 byte=8 bits. Parameter input . you will find that value as a property for the parameter in channel. for example -40°C or 0 RPM. not raw value. The parameter in channel value will be the calculated according to the above mentioned resolution and offset. resolution/bit and the offset of the parameter are documented in the SAE J1939 specification or supplied from the engine manufacturer. The channel has to be connected to a PGIN or GFIN channel to get its raw data. See property Unit. Specify the resolution (scaling) of this parameter. Specify the offset of this parameter. such as parameter length. Specify the length of this parameter. Properties Unit Error value The unit for the scaled value of this channel.125 RPM/bit. Define the common frame properties such as priority. For more information on J1939 error handling. This SAE J1939 parameter is not available in the source system. The PGN is then calculated as PF·256+PS. Parameter group out . Properties Priority An identifier that establishes the arbitration priority of the information communicated. On request: Use to only send the message upon request from the receiver. The properties for a PGOUT is almost the same as for a PGIN. The message will be sent at this interval even if its value is not changed. PGN is sometimes expressed as two numbers. PGN Send method IQANdesign User manual 155 .CAN channels 5 Channels Status Timeout Not available Inherited module status Corresponding PGIN not received within timeout period. Specify 0 (zero) to disable this function. You can also specify a minimum transmit rate (property “Transmit rate”). see section Parameter group in . a unique identifier for a parameter group. Continuously: Use for messages that are to be sent continuously. On trigger: Use for messages that are to be sent occasionally.PGIN on page 149. The highest priority is zero and the lowest priority is seven. See section Inherited module status on page 92. A data frame consist of both a PGOUT channel for the common frame properties and POUT channels with the unique parameter properties.PGOUT The parameter group output channel is used to send a J1939 parameter group (a PGN) to an external system. On change: Use to send the message every time any parameter in the message changes value. You also need to specify a channel to trigger a send (property “Trigger”). Parameter Group Number. You also need to specify the transmit rate (property “Transmit rate”). PF and PS. Trigger Unused bits Parameters Parameter > Channel Parameter > Offset Value Value Unit Range Type Status Digital pulse when parameter group is sent. Each time the channel value changes from False to True. The resolution for that single channel is 10 ms. Specify whether all unused bits in the data part of the message will be set to 0 or 1. This channel must be connected to a parameter group out. Select a channel to use as a trigger to send this frame. the frame is sent. The identifier is not affected.CAN channels 5 Channels Transmit rate [ms] Transmit rate for this CAN data frame. Parameter out . Add and define the parameters that are part of this channel (frame). Select the channel that defines this parameter. Alternatively. Resolution is system cycle time. you can click the button to place it graphically. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. The parameters values represent the data part of the message. IQANdesign User manual 156 .POUT The parameter output channel is used to write a value in a CAN data frame. PGOUT or GFOUT to work. Click the button to create a new channel. Fast PGOUT’s are not supported on modules connected to an XT2 module. One PGOUT channel with send method “Continuously” is allowed to have a transmit rate faster than the system cycle time. Enter the offset within this parameter group. for example 1°C/bit or 0. Specify the resolution (scaling) of this parameter. Specify the offset of this parameter. Properties Engine speed limits Input channel High and low idle speed. for example -40°C or 0 RPM.125 RPM/bit. Analog (integer number) Calculation overflow Inherited module status Value does not fit in defined length. Select a channel to control the value of this output. The selected channel should have a value range of 0 100%. IQANdesign User manual Priority Transmit rate [ms] 157 . The highest priority is zero and the lowest priority is seven. See section Inherited module status on page 92. Transmit rate for this CAN data frame. The properties for this channel are supplied from the engine manufacturer. value is set to 0.CAN channels 5 Channels Properties Input value Length [bits] Resolution [per bit] Offset Enter a value or select a channel to control the value of this output. TSC1 engine control . An identifier that establishes the arbitration priority of the information communicated. n/a 0 to (2Length-1) If input value does not fit in range. Specify the length of this parameter. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Calculated raw value. Resolution is 10 ms.TSC1 The TSC1 channel (PGN 0) is used to control the engine speed on a J1939 controlled engine. In the DM1 channel you have to specify the SPN convention method. “Torque control” . This is used as an input to the engine or retarder to determine the priority of the “Override control mode” received in the Torque/Speed Control message. “Speed/torque limit control” . Speed control conditions Override control mode priority Value Value Unit Range Type Status Command value. RPM See property Engine speed limits.CAN channels 5 Channels Override control mode The override control mode defines which sort of command is used: “Override disabled” .Control torque to the included “desired torque” value.DM1 This channel is used to read the active trouble codes in the diagnostic message from a J1939 module.Govern speed to the included “desired speed” value. Diagnostic message 1 .Limit speed and/or torque based on the included limit values. how the SPN messages are converted and also add the SPN in channels as parameters. This mode tells the engine control system the governor characteristics that are desired during speed control.Disable any existing control commanded by the source of this command. The speed limit governor is a droop governor where the speed limit value defines the speed at the maximum torque available during this operation. Properties SPN conversion method For further information about the different conversion methods we refer to SAE J1939-73 or the specification from the manufacturer. Analog (Real number) Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. IQANdesign User manual 158 . The DM1 channel works as a frame for all specified SPN in channels sent from the J1939 module. “Speed control” . and voltage too low corresponds to FMI 4. identified by a SPN. Value Value Unit Range Type Status Number of currently active SPN’s. Add and define the parameters that are part of this channel (frame). These FMI texts are used when a corresponding FMI text is not specified on an active SPN channel connected to this DM1 channel. Each FMI is represented by a number with a corresponding message. Properties SPN Suspect Parameter Number. This capability is especially useful for diagnostics.CAN channels 5 Channels FMI texts Failure mode descriptions. EXAMPLE Engine oil pressure sensor voltage is too low. The parameters values represent the data part of the message. such as a sensor. IQANdesign User manual 159 . FMI The FMI defines the type of failure detected on the ECU. Parameters Channel 1. n/a >= 0 Analog (Integer number) Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. a number used to identify a particular element. permitting an ECU which has detected a fault associated with a particular component. Each SPN must be connected to a DM1 channel to function. etc. Select the channel that defines this parameter. Suspect parameter number . that can be presented on the master display. Engine oil pressure corresponds to SPN 100.SPN The SPN channel is used to read diagnostic information on a J1939 module. 2. to transmit a fault message identifying the faulty component. or parameter associated with an ECU. component. Generic frame in . select “Don’t show”. If a failure mode is not specified here. Failure Mode Identifier. If you don’t want a dialog shown automatically. but with another identifier. The generic frame input works the same as the PGIN channel. Values 0 . Specify the identifier for this failure. The DM1 channel’s FMI text is overridden by the SPN’s unique FMI text.CAN channels 5 Channels Dialog priority A dialog is automatically shown when a failure is detected for this SPN. specified in the DM1 channel. Failures Failure > FMI Failure > Text Failures You can specify unique FMI texts for each SPN channel. n/a -1 to 31 Analog (Integer number) Channel value -1 is used to indicate that the SPN is not active at the moment.Typically it is used to read CAN-based protocols other than SAE J1939. you have to use the PIN channels in the same way as you would for the PGIN channel. Value Value Unit Range Type Failure mode identifier. the SPN’s unique FMI text is shown instead of the general FMI text. To read a parameter value from the frame data. Enter a text or select a text channel that describes this failure.31 correspond to active SPN’s FMI values. it will be taken from the DM1 this channel is connected to instead. Status Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. IQANdesign User manual 160 . “Message” has the lowest priority and “Critical” has the highest. When the FMI number is received from the J1939 module. Select a priority for the dialog. Specify failure mode identifiers and their corresponding text.GFIN The generic frame input channel is used to read a CAN data frame. Select constant “Don't care” to receive frames with variable data length. Specifies the page number for this channel. the frame is thrown away (and eventually causes timeout).CAN channels 5 Channels Properties Identifier Specify identifier for this frame. Example: 0x0F specifies the first four bits of the frame data as page number. See section Parameter group in . The parameters values represent the data part of the message. valid range is only 0 . It is also used by IQANdesign to check that the parameters added to this channel fits within the specified length. Select “Not used” if the protocol you are interpreting is not paged. Length is checked in run-time and if it doesn't match.0x7FF). You may therefore need to add some extra time.2047 (0x00 . Add and define the parameters that are part of this channel (frame). Enter maximum allowed transmit rate from the sender. Note: If you are using standard identifier size (11 bits). Identifier size is specified on the generic CAN bus that this channel is located on. Specify data length for this frame. Note: The transmit rate stated is often the average transmit rate.PGIN on page 149. Value Value Unit Range Type Digital pulse for one cycle when frame is received. Specifies the bits that are used for defining page number in a paged protocol. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital IQANdesign User manual 161 . Data length [bytes] Timeout [ms] Paged protocol > Page mask Paged protocol > Page value Parameters Paged protocol See section Paged protocol on page 151. Note: If you are using standard identifier size (11 bits). Properties Identifier Specify identifier for this frame. the frame is sent.GFOUT The generic frame output channel is used to send a CAN data frame. you have to use the POUT channels in the same way as for the PGOUT channel. Specify 0 (zero) to disable this function. Each time the channel value changes from False to True. On change: Use to send the message every time any parameter in the message changes value. The message will be sent at this interval even if its value is not changed. Resolution is system cycle time.0x7FF). On trigger: Use for messages that are to be sent occasionally. Data length [bytes] Send method Transmit rate [ms] Trigger Transmit rate for this CAN data frame. You also need to specify a channel to trigger a send (property “Trigger”). To add parameter values to the frame data. IQANdesign User manual 162 . You also need to specify the transmit rate (property “Transmit rate”). Typically it is used to send data to devices using other CAN protocols than SAE J1939. Select a channel to use as a trigger to send this frame. Continuously: Use for messages that are to be sent continuously.CAN channels 5 Channels Status Timeout Inherited module status Not received within the specified timeout period. Identifier size is specified on the generic CAN bus that this channel is located on. Generic frame out . Specify data length for this frame.2047 (0x00 . valid range is only 0 . You can also specify a minimum transmit rate (property “Transmit rate”). See section Inherited module status on page 92. The generic frame output works as the PGOUT channel but with another identifier. IQANdesign User manual 163 . The parameters values represent the data part of the message. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Inherited module status See section Inherited module status on page 92. Add and define the parameters that are part of this channel (frame).CAN channels 5 Channels Unused bits Specify whether all unused bits in the data part of the message will be set to 0 or 1. The identifier is not affected. Parameters Value Value Unit Range Type Status Digital pulse when frame is sent. See section Value on page 154. NOTE The channel types in this section are only available when application uses IQAN-MC3 as master module. No other master module types have support for these channel types.g. The status is OK only after a start block condition is fulfilled and there are no errors on the input channels or in the input channel comparison. physical inputs.AAC The analog/analog compare channel is used to perform a diagnostic check on an analog (primary) input channel that has another redundant analog (secondary) channel that follows its scaled value. otherwise the value is False. The channels also provide start block and error reset conditions to further improve safety. Compare channels The compare channels are used to compare a primary input channel with a secondary input channel to provide redundancy checks on e.Safety channels 5 Channels Safety channels The safety channels is used to implement safety related application functionality using for example redundant input channels and safe CAN communication between master modules. Analog/analog compare channel . Channel Enabled Start Block System ON System OFF Start Block Fault detected OK to start OK Fault detected Reset fault Error (input or diff check) Awaiting reset Fault gone Enable Disable Channel Disabled Compare channels state diagram. IQANdesign User manual 164 . The value of the compare channels is True when the status is OK. The value of the channel will be True when its status is OK. Scaled value Scaled value Raw value Raw value Scaled value Raw value Examples of primary and secondary channels. • Signals that follow each other. • Signals with a different offset and slope. otherwise the value will be False. the physical channels could be configured in three different ways: • Mirrored signals. IQANdesign User manual 165 .Safety channels 5 Channels If the primary input channel deviates from the secondary input channel with more than the configured difference check limit during a longer time than the configured detection delay the channel will go to error state. Properties Primary input The scaled value of the primary input will be compared to the scaled value of the secondary input. NOTE Since the AAC uses the scaled value of the input channels. NOTE Only the IQAN-MC3 master module has support for this channel type. After a detected fault is gone the channel will have the status start block until the reset fault channel changes from false to true. Abs(Primary . IQANdesign User manual 166 . If the primary input channel is equal to the secondary input channel during a longer time than the configured detection delay the channel will go to error state. OK to start Reset fault Value Value Unit Range Type Status True when its status is OK. otherwise the value will be False. otherwise False. Must be a multiple of the application cycle time. Note that the OK to start channel is also required to be true in order to leave the start block state. Digital/digital compare channel . Reset error or OK to start condition not met.Safety channels 5 Channels Secondary input Diff check limit Detection delay The scaled value of the secondary input will be compared to the scaled value of the primary input. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Input error Diff check error Start block Primary or secondary input channel’s status is not OK. The value of the channel will be True when its status is OK. States the allowed difference between the primary and secondary input before a fault is triggered. At startup or after fault has been detected (and reset).Secondary) > Diff check limit for a continuous period longer than Detection delay.DDC The digital/digital compare channel is used to perform a diagnostic check on a pair of antivalent digital channels. States the time that the primary input is allowed to deviate from the secondary input with more than the configured difference check limit before a fault is triggered. the channel will stay in start block state until the OK to start channel is true. Must be a multiple of the application cycle time. OK to start Reset fault Value Value Unit Range Type Status True when its status is OK. Properties Primary input Secondary input Detection delay The digital value of the primary channel will be compared to the digital value of the secondary channel. Primary = Secondary for a continuous period longer than Detection delay. After a detected fault is gone the channel will have the status start block until the reset fault channel changes from false to true. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital Input error Diff check error Start block Primary or secondary input channel’s status is not OK. At startup or after fault has been detected (and reset).Safety channels 5 Channels NOTE Only the IQAN-MC3 master module has support for this channel type. Note that the OK to start channel is also required to be true in order to leave the start block state. States the time that the primary input is allowed to have the same value as the secondary input before a fault is triggered. otherwise False. IQANdesign User manual 167 . Reset error or OK to start condition not met. the channel will stay in start block state until the OK to start channel is true.ADC The analog/digital compare channel is used to perform a diagnostic check on an analog (primary) input channel that has another redundant digital (secondary) channel that switches to true when the analog input is above a certain point. Analog/digital compare channel . The digital value of the secondary input will be compared to the digital value of the primary input. Properties Primary input The primary input is an analog channel that should be checked against the secondary digital input channel together with the configured switch over point. otherwise False. The digital input of the secondary input is expected to turn true when the value of the primary input is above a certain point. States the time that the primary input is allowed to deviate from the secondary input before a fault is triggered. Must be a multiple of the application cycle time.Safety channels 5 Channels The value of the channel will be True when its status is OK. Note that the OK to start channel is also required to be true in order to leave the start block state. otherwise the value will be False NOTE Only the IQAN-MC3 master module has support for this channel type. the channel will stay in start block state until the OK to start channel is true. At startup or after fault has been detected (and reset). States the value of the primary input channel at which the secondary input channel is expected to switch from false to true. After a detected fault is gone the channel will have the status start block until the reset fault channel changes from false to true. States the allowed difference between the value of the primary channel and the switch over point before a fault is triggered. Secondary input Switch over point Diff check limit Detection delay OK to start Reset fault Value Value Unit Range Type True when its status is OK. n/a False (= 0) or True (= 1) Digital IQANdesign User manual 168 . Properties Input type Unit Min limit The input type decides if the data being received is analog or digital. If the received value is below the min limit the channel status will be out of range and the value will be the configured error value. (Primary > (Switch over point + Diff check limit)) AND (Secondary = False) OR (Primary < (Switch over point . The error value is used when there is an error situation for the channel. Max limit Error value IQANdesign User manual 169 . Start block APPIN . The data is sent using a safe CAN protocol which makes it possible to use the channels in safety related functions. If the received value is above the min limit the channel status will be out of range and the value will be the configured error value. Maximum value allowed for the channel value. Reset error or OK to start condition not met. if the CAN message times out. Minimum value allowed for the channel value.Application input The application input channel is used to receive the value and status of a channel in another application. NOTE Only the IQAN-MC3 master module has support for this channel type. It is always used in conjunction with an application output channel on another master module.Safety channels 5 Channels Status Input error Diff check error Primary or secondary input channel’s status is not OK. For example.Diff check limit)) AND (Secondary = True) for a continuous period longer than Detection delay. Unit of the channel when input type is analog. the channel will use this value as its output value instead of the received value. See property Input type. The receiving end uses an application input channel to read the value and status. See property Unit. See properties Min limit and Max limit. CAN port on the module. The data is sent using a safe CAN protocol which makes it possible to use the channels in safety related functions.Application output The application output channel is used to send a channel's value and status at a specified rate from one application (master module) to another via a CAN bus. Properties Input channel The channel that value and status should be sent for. When configuring the timeout the transmit rate of the corresponding application output channel has to be considered as well as the cycle time of the applications. NOTE Only the IQAN-MC3 master module has support for this channel type. Timeout Out of range Internal error Inherited status Not received within timeout period. Application output ID CAN port Value Value Unit Range Type Status The latest value received. APPOUT . Note that this port cannot be connected to any other bus. When none of the above applies this channel inherits from the received status. IQANdesign User manual 170 . Value not within specified range.Safety channels 5 Channels Timeout Timeout after which the channel status will be set to error if no message has been received. Unique identifier of the application output channel that should be received by this application input channel. Illegal message received (invalid checksum or input type mismatch). You also need to specify the transmit rate (property “Transmit rate”). the frame is sent. You can also specify a minimum transmit rate (property “Transmit rate”). Specify 0 (zero) to disable this function. IQANdesign User manual 171 . On change: Use to send the message every time any parameter in the message changes value. CAN port on the module. Transmit rate Trigger Transmit rate for this CAN frame. Same as input channel. Same as input channel. Application output ID CAN port Value Value Unit Range Type Status The latest sent value of the input channel. The message will be sent at this interval even if its value is not changed. Each time the channel value changes from False to True. Select a channel to use as a trigger to send this frame. Same as input channel. Resolution is system cycle time. On trigger: Use for messages that are to be sent occasionally. You also need to specify a channel to trigger a send (property “Trigger”). Note that this port cannot be connected to any other bus. Inherited status The latest sent status of the input channel.Safety channels 5 Channels Send method Continuously: Use for messages that are to be sent continuously. Unique identifier of this application output used to connect a receiving application input channel to this output. Double clicking on a module in this view will open the traditional block diagram of the module. The IQAN system is based on adding necessary channels and functions associated with the appropriate modules. Selecting channels on the block diagram also displays the channel properties in the property inspector. buses and how to connect them to create a system. It is important to address the buses and modules when creating an application. IQANdesign User manual 172 . The application file must contain information about the modules and buses that will be used in the system. The application file is intended to reflect the connections that exist in the real system. thus designing your own control system. In IQANdesign. Selecting Modules in the application manager sets the view in the editor to show the system modules and the buses that connect them. Highlighting any module or bus causes the properties for that item to be displayed in the property inspector. it is easy to get a quick overview of how you have designed your system.6 Modules This chapter deals with modules. the J1939 modules are red and the Generic modules are green.Modules 6 Modules Modules There are two types of modules: masters and expansion modules. In IQANdesign the IQAN modules are blue in color. Each module of the same type on the same bus must have a unique address. For further information about the modules’ inputs and outputs. You can connect up to eight expansion modules per type on each ICP (IQAN CAN Protocol) CAN bus. Module address All modules that are connected to the ICP CAN bus must be addressed. A master module has one or more CAN buses. An IQAN system must always contain one master. The module address in the application file must correspond to the Id-tag address on the real module. The J1939 and Generic units are represented as J1939 modules and Generic modules respectively. and they can be configured to support different CAN protocols. There are up to eight addresses. The modules have various properties that you will find in the property inspector. The default address when you add a module in the application file is zero or the first available address if you drag it to an existing bus with other modules on it. IQANdesign User manual 173 . see information sheets for each module type. a cycle time of 50 ms equals a sampling frequency of 20 Hz. For example.Master modules 6 Modules Master modules This section contains information on the different master modules available for an IQAN application. It has four CAN buses. or select a channel to control this in run-time. Properties System cycle time [ms] Enter system cycle time. but with more memory available. 1 KB = 1 024 Bytes.5" 3. Comparison table Module type Display size CAN buses Volatile memory (RAM) Non-volatile memory (Flash) MDL2 MDL MD3 MC2 MC3 6. MDL/MDL2 MDL (Master Display Large) is a master module with a large color display. MDL2 is the same master module as MDL. Select “Yes” to reject incoming calls and/or SMS. Frequency for PWM and COUT outputs. incoming SMS will be stored and handled when this property goes False. A low value will increase the sampling frequency in the system and give shorter response times.5" - 4 4 3 2 4 2304 KB 1152 KB 832 KB 832 KB 1408 KB 3584 KB 1536 KB 1536 KB 832 KB 1536 KB 1 MB = 1 024 KB. The modules have both inputs and outputs. When True (“Yes”). A high value can be useful in a complex application to lower the utilization. Sampling frequency (number of samples per second) equals the inverse of the system cycle time.5" 6. PWM frequency [Hz] (COUT/PWM) GSM > Reject incoming calls IQANdesign User manual 174 . IQANdesign User manual 175 . It has three CAN buses. The module has both on/off and proportional inputs and outputs. a cycle time of 50 ms equals a sampling frequency of 20 Hz. incoming SMS will be stored and handled when this property goes False. Channel properties Digital out Soft start/stop Peak and hold Not available. Properties System cycle time [ms] Enter system cycle time. Select “Yes” to reject incoming calls and/or SMS. It has two CAN buses. The module has inputs and one digital output. GSM > Reject incoming calls GSM > Automatic answer Select this option to allow the IQAN system to answer incoming data calls without user confirmation. the remote IQAN system requires user confirmation for all incoming calls by showing caller id on its display. the remote IQAN system requires user confirmation for all incoming calls by showing caller id on its display. or select a channel to control this in run-time. MD3 MD3 (Master Display 3) is a master module with a small color display. When True (“Yes”). Sampling frequency (number of samples per second) equals the inverse of the system cycle time. Channel properties Digital out Soft start/stop Peak and hold Not available. With this option not selected. For example. A high value can be useful in a complex application to lower the utilization. MC2 MC2 is a master module without display. With this option not selected. Please move channel to another module to use these properties.Master modules 6 Modules GSM > Automatic answer Select this option to allow the IQAN system to answer incoming data calls without user confirmation. A low value will increase the sampling frequency in the system and give shorter response times. Please move channel to another module to use these properties. This happens for instance when the real time clock has not been powered for a longer period of time. For example. For example. see module data sheet. Not available.Master modules 6 Modules Properties System cycle time [ms] Enter system cycle time. For more details. A high value can be useful in a complex application to lower the utilization. in a 20 ms system all frequencies below 50 Hz will be detected as 0. IQANdesign User manual 176 . Select “No” to prevent module from blinking error code when the real time clock is not set correctly. Select “Yes” to set a current output to low current mode. The module has both on/off and proportional inputs and outputs. a cycle time of 50 ms equals a sampling frequency of 20 Hz. Therefor this property can be useful if your modules risk being powered off several days in a row and you don't want to bother your users with the clock error blink. Low current mode is suited for operating ranges below 200 mA. PWM frequency for digital outputs. MC3 is certified for safety related applications according to IEC-61508 up to SIL2 (Safety Integrity Level 2). Please move channel to another module to use these properties. A low value will increase the sampling frequency in the system and give shorter response times. Frequencies for PWM and COUT outputs. Low current mode selection for each current output. Sampling frequency (number of samples per second) equals the inverse of the system cycle time. Clock error enabled PWM frequencies [Hz] (COUT/PWM) PWM frequency [Hz] (DOUT) Low current mode Channel properties Frequency in Fast response With fast response all frequencies below system sampling frequency (= 1/system cycle time) will be detected as zero. It has four CAN buses. Digital out Soft start/stop Peak and hold MC3 MC3 is a master module without display. Defines the restart behaviour after an error has been detected on the output. For example.Master modules 6 Modules Properties Address Address for this module. None will cause the channel to remain in error state until the power is cycled and the error is gone. that channel's value must change from false to true and the output error must no longer be detected in order to leave error state. System cycle time [ms] PWM frequencies [Hz] (COUT/PWM) COUT restart behaviour • • DOUT restart behaviour DOUT under current detection Channel properties See "COUT restart behaviour" above. Sampling frequency (number of samples per second) equals the inverse of the system cycle time. A low value will increase the sampling frequency in the system and give shorter response times. Frequencies for PWM and COUT outputs. A high value can be useful in a complex application to lower the utilization. IQANdesign User manual 177 . When a channel is selected. Enter system cycle time. a cycle time of 50 ms equals a sampling frequency of 20 Hz. • The default behaviour is to remain in error state until the input is 0 and the error is no longer detected. The address tag must correspond to the address stated here. Please move channel to another module to use these properties. Enables or disables under current detection for each DOUT. Digital out Soft start/stop Peak and hold Not available. otherwise the module will not start. Enabled Channel properties Digital out Soft start/stop Peak and hold Not available. LL (Lever Large) or LM (Lever Mini). the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. LC5 Lever expansion module. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. such as levers. Enabled Channel properties Digital out Soft start/stop Peak and hold Not available. Please move channel to another module to use these properties.Expansion modules 6 Modules Expansion modules There are several different types of expansion modules. Properties Address Address on the CAN bus. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. Please move channel to another module to use these properties. Lx Lever expansion module. I/O modules. When the channel value is “False”. When the channel value is “False”. Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. radio controls. IQANdesign User manual 178 . etc. Two modules of the same type on the same CAN bus can not have the same address. Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. Properties Address Address on the CAN bus. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. XA2 All-round expansion module with both inputs and outputs. Two modules of the same type on the same CAN bus can not have the same address. Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. Two modules of the same type on the same CAN bus can not have the same address. Properties Address Address on the CAN bus. IQANdesign User manual 179 . Frequency for PWM and COUT outputs. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. Properties Address Address on the CAN bus. PWM frequency for digital outputs. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. When the channel value is “False”. Two modules of the same type on the same CAN bus can not have the same address. Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. Enabled PWM frequency [Hz] (DOUT) XC10 Expansion module with focus on inputs. Two modules of the same type on the same CAN bus can not have the same address. Enabled PWM frequency [Hz] (COUT/PWM) PWM frequency [Hz] (DOUT) XS2 Expansion module with focus on inputs. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. PWM frequency for digital outputs. When the channel value is “False”. otherwise 0 (zero)/False.Expansion modules 6 Modules Properties Address Address on the CAN bus. When the channel value is “False”. COUTA/B [Hz] PWM frequency [Hz] 180 .Expansion modules 6 Modules Enabled Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. It will only let the J1939 messages you have defined in your application pass through to the master module. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. Dither frequency for current outputs. and thereby decrease the traffic on the master module’s CAN bus. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. J1939 CAN bus The XT2 module can be used as a gateway to J1939 modules. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. • The priority value “Don’t care” on parameter group inputs is not allowed. Properties Address Address on the CAN bus. It has one J1939 CAN bus to control and diagnose J1939 modules and a servo output that can be used to control an E-Gas. IQANdesign User manual Enabled Dither amplitude. • The total number of parameter group inputs and number of DM1 multiplied by three on all J1939 modules connected to a single XT2 module must not exceed 13. Frequencies for PWM outputs. PWM frequencies [Hz] XT2 Expansion module with focus on transmission control. When using the J1939 CAN bus on the XT2 there are some limitations to keep in mind. Enter dither amplitude in mA for the current output. COUTA/B [mA] Dither frequency. When the channel value is “False”. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. Two modules of the same type on the same CAN bus can not have the same address. • The total number of parameter group outputs and number of TSC1 on all J1939 modules connected to a single XT2 module must not exceed 13. Frequency for PWM outputs. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. for example a diesel engine ECU. The priority for each of these messages can be set here. Channel properties Digital out Soft stop Not available. IQANdesign User manual 181 . Only one allowed on each bus. The default values are set to the recommended default values in SAE J1939. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. Please move channel to another module to use this property.Expansion modules 6 Modules J1939 diagnostic messages Priorities for diagnostic messages. The highest priority is zero and the lowest priority is seven. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. Properties Enabled Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. SAE J1939 default priority is 7. SAE J1939 default priority is 7. The XT2 module will use the same priorities for all J1939 modules connected to its CAN bus. XR Radio controlled expansion module. The highest priority is zero and the lowest priority is seven. J1939 External (non-IQAN) expansion module that uses the SAE J1939 protocol. When the channel value is “False”. DTM (Data Transfer Message) and DM1 (Diagnostic Message 1). There are three priorities diagnostic messages specified by SAE J1939. J1939 diagnostic messages Priority for DTM (Data Transfer Message) diagnostic priorities > DTM priority message. J1939 diagnostic messages Priority for DM1 (Diagnostic Message 1) diagnostic priorities > DM1 priority message. The highest priority is zero and the lowest priority is seven. J1939 diagnostic messages Priority for BAM (Broadcast Announcement Message) priorities > BAM priority diagnostic message. These are BAM (Broadcast Announcement Message). SAE J1939 default priority is 6. Properties Enabled Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time.Expansion modules 6 Modules Properties Enabled Select “Yes” to make this module enabled all the time. When the channel value is “False”. If the master module does not receive any packet within a timeout interval from this module. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. it will be detected as offline. Enter a timeout value. it will be detected as offline. Enter the J1939 source address for this module. This is used to detect whether the module is online or offline. the module is disabled and all its channels are set to error value when available. Timeout [ms] IQANdesign User manual 182 . Source address Timeout [ms] Generic External (non-IQAN) expansion module that uses other CAN protocols than SAE J1939. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. If the master module does not receive any packet within a timeout interval from this module. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. Example: A diesel engine is usually address 0. Enter a timeout value. When the channel value is “False”. This is used to detect whether the module is online or offline. otherwise 0 (zero)/False. our own proprietary protocol. Can be useful on buses that carry slow modules or when you are using a very high system sample rate (see master module property System cycle time).Buses 6 Modules Buses There are three types of buses. Bus index If there are several buses. Properties Bus index Terminated Sample rate divider Bus index. • ICP (IQAN CAN Protocol). B. Each bus must have a unique index. It must not exceed 100 ms. All IQAN expansion modules use the ICP CAN bus to communicate to the master module. a divider of 3 means that the modules are polled every third sample. For modules with less than four CAN buses. IQANdesign User manual 183 . The index may be A. that is. a bus that is used to handle other types of CAN protocols. Select “Not used” to disable this feature. Master modules support any of the above bus protocols. Properties Bus index Bus index. the proprietary IQAN CAN bus. ICP IQAN CAN Protocol. Each bus must have a unique index. C or D and is presented as a property in the property inspector for the specific bus. J1939 A bus that uses the SAE J1939 protocol. with a cycle time of 50 ms it is polled every 150 ms. each bus needs to be indexed. • J1939. • Generic. Divides the system sample rate on this CAN bus. the modules on this bus are not polled every sample. For example. that is. only corresponding indices are allowed. a CAN bus for the SAE J1939 protocol. otherwise it can cause expansion modules to time out unexpectedly. Note: The bus sample time is calculated by multiplying the system sample time with the sample rate divider for the actual bus. Select “Yes” to make this bus terminated on the master module end. Enter the source address that IQAN should be on this bus. You are allowed to share the same index with an ICP bus. Each bus must have a unique index. IQAN can have different source addresses on each J1939 bus and thereby act as multiple J1939 sources in a machine. It is also allowed to have multiple J1939 buses with the same index as long as they have different Source address. Generic A bus that uses other CAN protocols than SAE J1939. This means you can run both ICP and J1939 traffic on the same physical CAN bus. This can be useful if you need to communicate with two different J1939 modules on the same bus that requires different source address from IQAN. Specify the identifier size. IQANdesign User manual 184 . The gear box also needs to communicate with the diesel engine so they have to be on the same physical CAN bus. Example: You have a gear box that requires IQAN to be source address 23 and a diesel engine that requires IQAN to be source address 39. Bus speed in kilobit per second.Buses 6 Modules Terminated Source address Select “Yes” to make this bus terminated on the master module end. "Standard (11 bits)" or "Extended (29 bits)". Properties Bus index Terminated Speed [kbps] Identifier size Bus index. Select “Yes” to make this bus terminated on the master module end. You design and connect your system of modules and CAN buses in the editor. In this way you can add all necessary modules and then connect them to the appropriate buses. Drop the expansion module on the bus. Thereafter you will be able to move it to the desired bus. Add modules There are two ways of adding modules. IQANdesign User manual 185 . select the module icon.How to connect a system in IQANdesign 6 Modules How to connect a system in IQANdesign Select Modules in the application manager. Add buses To add a bus connection to the system you first need to add the module that handles the type of bus you want to select. If you want to add a module to an existing bus (not a master module). drag it to the bus and drop it on the bus connector. Enter the proper module address for each module in the property inspector. You will find the different modules and buses at two tabs in the tool bar above the editor. Then enter the bus index letter in the property inspector. Drag the desired bus type and drop it on the module. Select the Buses tab in the tool bar above the editor. Otherwise. you can click on the module you want to add and the module will appear at the right side in the editor. To add modules and buses you may use drag and drop or just click on the module you want to add. This can be very useful if you need to transfer both ICP and J1939 messages on the same physical bus. Measure It is possible to measure module status. For more information see section Measure in other views on page 195. IQANdesign User manual 186 . Sharing a bus Two buses can share the same index if one is an ICP bus and the other is a J1939 bus.How to connect a system in IQANdesign 6 Modules Some modules will automatically create a bus when they are added. CAN bus utilization and CAN bus status in the modules view. CAN bus utilization is measured as percent used bandwidth out of maximum available on each separate CAN bus. Click the channel name to select it and see its properties in the property inspector. The block diagram contains physical inputs and outputs as well as some virtual outputs for module diagnostics. When there is more than one pin. For each input/output there is an index and its corresponding pin number(s). Greyed out indexes indicates that the corresponding pin is occupied by another channel type. the channel name is shown next to the index box.Block diagram 6 Modules Block diagram Each module will be represented with a block diagram where all of the module’s input and output channels will be connected. IQANdesign User manual 187 . Double-click on the module to open the block diagram or click on the module in the application manager. Using the list tab of the module editor you will get a list of all the physical pin and information on which channel they are assigned to. If a channel is assigned to an index. Block diagram IQAN-MD3. details about the function of each pin is available as a tool tip by hovering with the mouse pointer over the index box. Some channel connectors can handle multiple channel types. When one of these connectors is occupied. Add channels to a module There are two ways of connecting channels to the modules. Rightclick on the channel connector and select Add Channel. just unassigned. Measure It is possible to measure channel value and status in the block diagram view. First. then the channel connectors that share pins with it are “grayed out” to notify you that the pins are used and the other channel types are unavailable. Moving channels Move a channel to another index by dragging it to the corresponding connector. but only one at a time. IQANdesign User manual 188 . then you drag the channels from the application editor and drop them on the module in the application manager. which is recommended. the channels will switch places. The channel will not be deleted. For more information see section Measure in other views on page 195.Block diagram 6 Modules Pin list of the module editor. Right-click on a channel and select Remove in the popup menu to remove it completely from the module. if you already have created your application. The second way is to add the channels in the block diagram directly. If that connector is occupied by another channel. In IQANdesign you can measure both graphical and numerical values.7 Measure groups We take it for granted that you will need to take measurements on signals and channels when you develop or troubleshoot an application file in the machine. IQANdesign User manual 189 . IQANdesign or IQANrun. Measure groups are used when you measure in the master display. The measure groups will help you to organize the channels or measure items as they are also referred to. when measuring with a master module display and with IQANdesign or IQANrun. Select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time.Measure groups 7 Measure groups Measure groups The reason for using measure groups is to organize your channels for measurements in different situations. Properties Visible Select “Yes” to make this measure group visible on the master display or in IQANrun. select Application > Add > Add Measure Group. Select “No” to make this group visible only in IQANdesign. Measure features in the IQAN-MDL. The properties for the new measure group will be in the property inspector and the properties will be applied to the whole measure group. If you have grouped some important channels together. Select Add Measure Group. Or. it can give the service personnel a quicker overall view of the situation and hopefully save them some time. IQANdesign User manual 190 . Add a new measure group Open the application manager and right click on the Measure groups item. NOTE It is better to have several small measure groups instead of one big group. the visible measure groups will appear in the measure menu on the master display. All channels in the function group will be added to the measure group.Measure groups 7 Measure groups View access level Specify required access level to view this measure group. Select "Not used" to use the regular time axis. It is possible to add the same channel to several measure groups. X-axis item Add channels or measure items to a measure group Use drag and drop to add channels to the measure groups. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to see this measure group. Users with lower access level will not be able to see this measure group in the menu system in the master display or IQANrun. With smaller groups you probably won’t need to use the scroll bars to see all of the channels in a group at the same time. You can also drag function groups. Observe that the property concerns the whole measure group. IQANdesign User manual 191 . Select the channels in the application editor or in the channel list and then drag the channel to the particular measure group in the application manager. Select a measure item to use as the X axis in X/Y measure mode. Measure groups in master module display When you have downloaded the application file. click the stop button in the tool bar above the graph or press <Shift + F7>. On the right side of the window you will find the property inspector with the properties for each measure item. This is to make sure you are measuring the correct values. To stop a measurement manually. select Measure > Start Measure. the measure group’s content (all measured values) will also be saved in that file so you can examine it later. Underneath the graph there is a list with all the measure items and some statistics from the last measurements. The measure window in IQANdesign has a graph in the middle.Measure in IQANdesign 7 Measure groups Measure in IQANdesign When you select a measure group in the application manager you will also open the measure window. select Measure > Stop Measure. Start/Stop measure To start a measurement. see section Application id on page 25. ATTENTION The application id in the current application and the measured application has to match to allow measuring. Measure view in IQANdesign. click the start measure button in the tool bar above the graph or press the function key F7. If you save your application. IQANdesign User manual 192 . For more information. You have to use the two cursors to generate the statistic values. but in the options for IQANdesign you can easily change the colors.. A dialog box is displayed where you can change printer. Measure groups tab or right click on the graph window and select Options. Select Tools > Options.. select Measure > Clear. Graph options By default the background of the graph is black and the grid color is gray. Clear values To clear all measured values.. You can also change the default channel colors.. printer properties and/or options.. Measure group options.Measure in IQANdesign 7 Measure groups Print Select File > Print to print the measured graph with statistics. IQANdesign User manual 193 .. . you can look at all measure groups to analyze what happened. The value does only affect the display updating while measuring. Max update rate This is the maximum display update rate. samples can be lost due to communication problems or by measuring too many channels.Measure in IQANdesign 7 Measure groups Glitch detect Glitch detect can be useful to detect short pulses or glitches in a large log. you should not select this option. Missing samples are then calculated by interpolation between the surrounding values. and check the Glitch detect box. This means that if you measure for a couple of minutes and then stop. With glitch detect IQANdesign presents min and max values in each point instead of mean value.. Then it can be useful to decrease this value. Applies to X/Y mode also. This makes it possible to easily find glitches in very large logs. Without glitch detect IQANdesign uses mean value calculation when presenting a large amount of data in the graph. Measure all measure groups With this checked you will always measure all measure groups while you are measuring. Select Mark missing samples in graph to draw missing samples with a darker color in the graph. Missing samples When measuring. If you experience performance problems. IQANdesign User manual 194 . If your computer is slow or you are measuring a lot of channels the display can have problems to show all values in real time. select Options. right click in the graph. Time depth This is the amount of data shown while you are measuring. To enable glitch detect. all values are still stored for each system sample. Select the number of continuos samples that needs to be missing before marking them in the graph under Missing samples threshold. for example when measuring over a modem connection. The min and max values on the Y axis in the graph. The channel that this measure item measures. i. Select “Yes” to make this item visible when viewing the measure group it belongs to.e. Status type is also indicated by a lamp with one of four colors. when it is controlled by a channel. You can measure all channels in a function group view. the list of measure items is not updated. To update the list you must leave the measure group and enter it again. It is possible to change the channel for this item. Properties Name Channel Visible Enter a name to identify this application component. Select a channel to control its visibility in run-time. Measure is started and stopped in the same way as when measuring a measure group. You can choose a different name if you like. If the value of the property changes when viewing the measure group.Measure in IQANdesign 7 Measure groups Measure item properties When you have added a channel to a measure group. Color Min value Max value Visible property The visible property is only checked when entering a measure group on a display or in IQANrun. see section Start/Stop measure on page 192. Gray Green Yellow Red Info OK Warning Error IQANdesign User manual 195 . Select the color you want to use when measuring graphically. By default. Select a measure item in the item list. Each item’s properties will be shown in the property inspector to the right. Note: Selecting "No" will only make the measure item visible in IQANdesign. Measure in other views It is possible to measure in other views than the measure group view. a channel list or a module block diagram. it becomes a measure item. the measure item gets the same name as its channel. Each channel will be presented with value and status. CAN bus utilization and CAN bus status can be measured in the modules view. Measure in function group view.Measure in IQANdesign 7 Measure groups For more information. Module status. IQANdesign User manual 196 . see section Value and status on page 89. Values Value 1 Value 2 Min Max Peak to Peak Mean True RMS T1 The item’s value at the left cursor’s position. The item’s lowest value between the two cursors. Mean value between the cursors. (time measurement) IQANdesign User manual 197 . Select the curve you want to measure on by selecting it in the items list. The statistics are generated after the measurements are stopped. Mean value between the two cursors. You will find the two cursors as small arrows above the graph.Statistics 7 Measure groups Statistics Use the two cursor lines in the measure group view to read the exact values of a point on the measured curves in the graph. Position the cursors The cursors are two vertical lines which can be positioned along the X-axis. You can move both the cursor lines at the same time by holding down <Shift> while you move one of the cursors. You will find different statistic values depending on how you place the cursors. Calculation carried out as per true RMS. Right-click in the graph and select Lock left cursor or Lock right cursor. you can move the cursor back to the default position by clicking on it while holding down <Ctrl>. The difference between Max and Min described above. Also. Statistics On the lower right side of the graph you will find measurement statistics belonging to the actual or selected channel. The item’s highest value between the two cursors. The selected or actual curve will have a thicker line so you can find it in the graph. The item’s value at the right cursor’s position. You can use the cursors as soon as you have stopped the measurement. Drag each cursor to the desired position. Locking the cursors The cursors can be locked in their positions. Left cursor position at the X-axis. You move each cursor by dragging it. Exporting If you want to do more advanced statistics it is possible to export all measured values to an external program. Measure files have the extension irm. Select file format in the Save dialog box. Measure files To save a measure to a file. NOTE To open a measure file in IQANdesign you must first open the application that the measure file belongs to. enter a file name and click Save. Start the other program and select Paste. Microsoft Excel will be started after the file has been saved to show the result. (time measurement) Time between the two cursors. Time between the minimum and maximum value between the two cursors. Right click in the graph and select Copy values as text. It is also possible to save the measurement in Microsoft Excel Workbook format. All values are now copied to Windows clipboard.Statistics 7 Measure groups T2 T2-T1 Rise time/Fall time Right cursor position at the X-axis. for example Microsoft Excel. The file can later be opened in either IQANdesign or IQANrun. Measure files that has been saved by IQANrun can also be opened in IQANdesign. select Measure > Save As. IQANdesign User manual 198 . The heading alternates between Rise and Fall depending on which value is first. Select folder. Shortcut keyboard command <Ctrl+U>. Use Auto scale join to make each channel’s values fit within the Y axis limits. Zoom out To view the complete curves again. Auto scaling It is possible to auto scale each channel.Zooming 7 Measure groups Zooming You can zoom in on (enlarge) parts of the graph to study the curves in detail. Zoom in time or X-axis only Position the both the cursors on either side of the area to be zoomed. The channels’ values will overlap. View range between cursors. To move all curves at the same time. right click in the graph and select Zoom out or select Measure > Zoom Out. you can move the active curve in the Y (up/down) direction. Select the zoom area by holding the left mouse button while you drag the mouse cursor over the desired enlargement area. Zoom in You can easily select a section of the curves to be enlarged. Use the vertical scroll bar on the right of the graph to move the curve of the selected measure item. All channels will be visible in the graph without any overlapping. A zoom area is built around what will be enlarged. Right click in the graph and select. Use Auto scale split to split the channels so that no channel will overlap any other channel. select the measure group in the application manager and use the vertical scroll bar. Another way of doing this is to zoom in as described in the section above while holding <Shift> down. Move a curve along the Y-axis If the curves are positioned onto one other. IQANdesign User manual 199 . Scroll in X and Y directions There are two scroll bars to move the graph and curves in either horizontal or vertical. The advantage with this feature is that you can adjust an output channel to match the load in the best way. It means that those channels have parameters that can easily be adjusted from the master display or another PC software called IQANrun. without having to update the application. IQANdesign User manual 200 . or you can calibrate an input signal for different sensors to suit your application perfectly.8 Adjust groups Some of the channels in your application can be made adjustable. The factory default value can be set from IQANrun. It is also possible to control access to this function. NOTE The factory default value is normally only set in production. It should be a “usable” value that the machine operator can always trust and reset his settings to. To make the machine manoeuvrable. Later on the machine user can reset the adjustable values for a channel or parameter to the factory default value. the channel has to be selected as adjustable and also be a member of an adjust group. First adjust the parameter to a desired value. The application default values are specified for each channel in the application. there are no adjustable or factory default values. Factory default Each parameter also has a factory default value. The following channels and parameters are adjustable: Voltage in Current out Min [mV] Max [mV] Min current [mA] Max current [mA] Start slope [ms] Stop slope [ms] Min MR [%] Max MR [%] Start slope [ms] Stop slope [ms] Min [mV] Max [mV] Value PWM out Servo out Function parameter To be able to adjust a channel parameter from the master display or IQANrun. IQANdesign User manual 201 . see section Adjust groups on page 206. the application default values are then used. then press the set factory default button to copy the adjustable value to the factory default value.Adjustable channel types 8 Adjust groups Adjustable channel types Some channel types have parameters that can be adjusted without having to load a new application. Application default The first time an application is loaded in a master module. that is. A mode selector is used to decide which parameter value set is used in run-time. multiple sets of parameter values. ATTENTION The application default value is only used when the application is loaded in an empty master module or when you have added a new channel that does not exist in the master module. Sometimes it is desirable to copy all parameter values from one mode to another. It should be a “safe” value that will work in any machine without risk. This can be achieved by using adjust groups with the property Allow mode copy enabled. IQANdesign User manual 202 . separate driver settings or working modes. for example.Adjustable channel types 8 Adjust groups See each channel section in section Channels on page 87 for more information on the application default values. Mode copying is done via the adjust menu in the master display or IQANrun. Modes Some adjustable channels can have multiple modes. Modes can serve different purposes. State parameter Text parameter Event counter Memorizing Timer (Hours) PIN code SMS in Default state (0) Value of property Text Value of property Reset value Value of property Reset value Value of property Reset value Value of property PIN code Value of property Default value To be able to adjust a stored channel from the master display or IQANrun. For more information. The difference from adjustable channel types is that stored channels don’t have any factory default value to reset to. IQANdesign User manual 203 . Instead. The table below shows which stored channel types can be adjusted and which value they use for reset. Some of them can also be adjusted through adjust groups. the channel has to be a member of an adjust group. see each channel type. it will use the application default value from the application file when reset.Stored channel types 8 Adjust groups Stored channel types Stored channel types store their value to preserve it during power-off. NOTE This dialog box can be disabled in Tools > Options. Stored values Select this check box to overwrite all stored values in the master module with the default values in the application. The check box is called Show send/get options dialog. Adjustable values Select this check box to overwrite all adjustable values in the master module with the default values in the application. When you send an application to a master module using IQANdesign you will have the option to override some settings in the master module with the default values in the application. the adjustable values for a voltage input will be overwritten with its properties Min [mV] and Max [mV] defined in the application.Send application 8 Adjust groups Send application When sending an application there are some options regarding settings. IQANdesign User manual 204 . For example. For example. Make sure it is selected if you want to use this feature. tab Dialog. Send application options. the stored value of an event counter will be overwritten with its property Reset value defined in the application. Factory default values Select this check box to overwrite all factory default values in the master module with the default values in the application. A dialog box is shown where you can select these options. see section Send application on page 282. For more information on send application. For more information on get application. see section Get application on page 283. Import adjustable values Select this check box to copy all adjustable values from the master module to the default values in the application. When you get an application from a master module using IQANdesign you will have the option to import the adjustable values in the master module to the application. The check box is called Show send/get options dialog. NOTE This dialog box can be disabled in Tools > Options. A dialog box is shown where you can select this options. Make sure it is selected if you want to use this feature. IQANdesign User manual 205 . tab Dialog. Get application options. the properties Min [mV] and Max [mV] for a voltage input will be overwritten with its current adjustable values in the master module.Get application 8 Adjust groups Get application When getting an application there are some options regarding settings. For example. Specify required access level to adjust the items in this adjust group. Specify required access level to set factory default values for the adjust items in this adjust group. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. otherwise the user will not see the adjust group and can therefore not set factory defaults. when it needs to be adjusted in the machine. A PIN code is always four digits. One idea to keep in mind is that it should make it easier for authorized personnel to find the actual channel. Enter a PIN code or select a PIN code channel to protect this adjust group. It is often better to have several small groups so you don’t need to use the scroll bar to find a particular channel. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to set factory defaults. PIN code Access levels > View/Adjust Access levels > Set factory default value IQANdesign User manual 206 . For systems without a display.Adjust groups 8 Adjust groups Adjust groups The adjust groups are used to group or organize channels that are adjustable. To adjust a channels value. for example 0472. It is a good idea to name the group so it is easy to identify the channels it contains. Users with lower access level will not be able to see this adjust group or adjust its items in any way. for example Diesel engine or Crane functions. use a PC with IQANrun to access the adjust groups. Properties Visible Select “Yes” to make this group visible from the master display or IQANrun. Users with lower access level will not be able to set factory defaults. just select the group where the channel is placed and then select the particular channel that you want to adjust. It is up to the designer to decide how the channels will be grouped. Note: “View” access level must be same or lower. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to see and adjust this adjust group. In IQAN systems where there is a display available you will find the adjust groups in a list in the adjust menu. You can also use a PIN code channel to protect it. Reference channel Protect an adjust group You can decide to protect an adjust group from unauthorized personnel. either by using a PIN code or by defining access levels. The reference channel is measured during adjustment.Adjust groups 8 Adjust groups Allow mode copy Select “Yes” to enable the “Copy mode” button in the adjust menu. Select a channel to use as reference when adjusting channels in this group. There are two ways to do that. for example 0472. When you have downloaded the application file to the master you have to enter the PIN code to have access to the adjust group. it should not be allowed for the drivers to adjust the Diesel engine adjust group but the service personnel should have full access. see section PIN code channel . Note 2: Text parameter channels will not be copied. The adjust menu in the IQAN-MDL master display. Copy mode is used to copy all adjustable parameters from one mode to another for all adjust items in this group. You can also select a digital value channel to enable the copy mode button in run time.PCC on page 142. PIN code The simplest way to protect an adjust group is to define a four character PIN code for it. That is done with the jog-shuttle control on the display or with the help of a dialog box in IQANrun. For example. Note 1: All adjust items (channels) in the group has to be controlled by the same “Mode selector” (or none) to use this function. A PIN code protected adjust group is marked with a lock symbol in the adjust menu. IQANdesign User manual 207 . There can be one reference channel for each adjust group. it won’t be visible in any menus and the highest access level possible is required to change it in any other way. Enter the necessary properties for that group in the property inspector. The reference channel will be measured and displayed during adjustment. Reference channel Sometimes it will help to have a reference channel during the adjustment process. You will find it as a property for the adjust group. Or. but it will not be protected from being changed by sending a settings file or a clone file to a master or when using a script in IQANrun to adjust a channel. To protect channels from being changed in any way you must add them to an adjust group. where they can also find other more important channels that the driver is not supposed to adjust. select Add Adjust Group.Adjust groups 8 Adjust groups Access levels A safer and more user friendly way to protect an adjust group is by using access levels. ATTENTION Adjustable channels that are not part of any adjust group will be protected from being adjusted from the adjust menu on the master display or in IQANrun. the adjust group is not shown in the list of available groups. Visibility With the property Visible you can decide when you want an adjust group to be visible in the adjust menu. IQANdesign User manual 208 . The user has to be logged in with at least view access level to see the adjust group. The access level for such a channel will be the lowest of all the adjust groups that it belongs to. one level for view access and another level for set factory default access. You can select to have a digital input channel to control the visibility at run time. If not. You can define two access levels for an adjust group. That way. For example you may want to see a specific input channel’s value when you adjust the outputs. Add a new adjust group Right-click on the Adjust groups node in the application manager. NOTE An adjustable channel can be added to several adjust groups. select Application > Add > Add Adjust Group. This can be useful if perhaps you want to have one adjust group for the driver and another group for the service personnel. set Access level > View/Adjust to Root and set Visible to False. an adjust item is created for that channel. Use drag and drop to move the items in the list. Select the adjust group in the application manager to view the adjust items.Adjust items 8 Adjust groups Adjust items Select the group in the application manager. It can be a good idea to have the most frequently used items on the top of the list so you can quickly reach those channels. IQANdesign User manual 209 . Select the channel in the application editor or in the channel list. NOTE When reordering items. to view all the adjust items that the adjust group contains. It is possible to reorder the adjust items in the list. Properties Channel Visible The channel that this adjust item adjusts. All items are displayed in a list in the editor in the middle. When a channel is added to an adjust group. The order represents the position in the adjust menu in the master display or IQANrun. Drag it to the desired adjust group node in the application manager and drop it there. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. The adjust item gets the same name as its channel by default. make sure the list is sorted on the Order column to avoid confusion. Add channels to an adjust group Use drag and drop to add a channel to the group. but it can be changed into something more appropriate for the master display/ IQANrun adjust menu. Select “Yes” to make this item visible from the master display or IQANrun. IQANdesign User manual 210 . NOTE If the channel has several modes. Check the channel’s Adjustable property. such as voltage inputs and current outputs. you need to check the Adjustable property for all the modes that you want to be able to adjust. Some channel types. for example a current output can have several “current settings”. the adjust group and their items (channels) will appear in the adjust menu. If you forget to make it adjustable you simply cannot adjust any of the channel’s parameters. You can prevent a single parameter from being adjustable by setting min and max limit to the same value for that parameter. allow you to set min and max limits for each adjustable parameter. It is important to make the channel adjustable before you add it to an adjust group.Adjust items 8 Adjust groups When you download the application file. Such channels will be indicated with a lock symbol in adjust menus. In addition to the system log. Logs can be viewed in the master display menu system or in IQANrun. An event log stores events that you define with the help of the event log channel type. IQANdesign User manual 211 . There can only be one system log. you can have as many event and statistics logs as you like. A statistics log store the latest value of a given statistic log item.9 Logs An application always contains a system log where system generated events are stored. Above the list of logs a toolbar is available with the type of logs that can be added. Click a column header to change the list’s sort order. The order is used when logs are listed in the master display’s/IQANrun’s log menu. logging stops. Log list. Log memory status is available through the System output channel. When the memory is full. The logs are stored in non-volatile memory. Drag and drop your logs in the list to change their order. We recommend that you sort on the column Order when you are rearranging your log order. under the node Logs. see section System output . To add a new log click on the type of log that you want to add.SYSOUT on page 132. IQANdesign User manual 212 . Select it to view a list of all your logs in the editor.Logs 9 Logs Logs You will find all your logs in the application manager. IQANdesign or IQANrun license number. the log is disabled and will not log any events. Its default name is System log. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. under the node Logs. You will find it in the application manager. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. Enabled IQANdesign User manual 213 . Channel name. module/pin connection and status. When the channel value is “False”. User name and access level. Select “Yes” to make this log enabled all the time. IQANrun license number. Properties These are the properties for the system log. Date and time before change. IQANrun license number. Information added by an IQANrun user or a script. IQANrun license number. Firmware version.System log 9 Logs System log The system log is automatically added to your application. System events These are the events stored in the system log. but you can change it to whatever you want. IQANrun license number. IQANrun license number. Event Information stored Application changed Machine id changed System started Channel alarms/errors Module alarms/errors CAN bus alarms/errors Clock changed Login/Logout External log item Log cleared Settings changed NOTE Application name and version. Some events are not stored until the system is restarted. New machine id. CAN bus name and status. Module name and status. Visible Select “Yes” to make this log visible from the master display or IQANrun. Specify required access level to view this log. see section PIN code channel . When the clearing channel’s value changes from False to True. Access levels > View Access levels > Clear Clearing channel PIN code For more information. Select a channel to clear the log. Specify required access level to clear this log. A PIN code is always four digits. This can be useful for example to do automatic clearing of a log when it is almost full or to let the operator clear a log by using a virtual digital in channel connected to a display page button. Users with lower access levels will not be able to see this log in the master menu system or IQANrun. Access levels For more information. NOTE When using a clearing channel to clear a log any PIN code or access level protection will be disregarded. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to see this log. Clearing channel Allows you to clear a log using the value of a digital channel. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to clear this log. all records in this log will be cleared. for example 0472. NOTE: This function overrides any PIN code or access level protection.PCC on page 142.System log 9 Logs PIN code Enter a PIN code or select a PIN code channel to protect this log. IQANdesign User manual 214 . Users with lower access levels will not be able to clear this log in IQANrun. The PIN code has to be entered to view the log records. see section Access levels on page 271. Event log channel list. A list with all log items in the event log is shown. Conditions for when and what to log is decided by one or more log items. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. or select Application > Add > Add Event Log. Select the event log in the application manager. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. Properties These are the properties for an event log. Visible Select “Yes” to make this log visible from the master display or IQANrun. the log is disabled and will not log any events. right-click on the node Logs in the application manager and select Add Event Log in the popup menu. The log can also be added using the toolbar in the log list. Above the log item list a toolbar is available with the log item types that can be added. When the channel value is “False”.Event log 9 Logs Event log Event logs are used to store events generated by the application. Add an event log To add an event log. Enabled IQANdesign User manual 215 . Select “Yes” to make this log enabled all the time. Value log item The value log item is used to log a value of a channel when a certain condition is fulfilled. IQANdesign User manual 216 . Users with lower access levels will not be able to see this log in the master menu system or IQANrun. When the value of the function changes from false to true a log record is created with the value of the channel specified in the log value property. Access levels For more information. Specify required access level to view this log. The condition is determined by the function of the value log item. Properties Log value Select the channel which value will be logged when the log condition is fulfilled. see section Access levels on page 271. Select a channel to clear the log. Specify required access level to clear this log. Users with lower access levels will not be able to clear this log in IQANrun. The PIN code has to be entered to view the log records. Access levels > View Access levels > Clear Clearing channel PIN code For more information. NOTE When opening an old application that contains event log channels.Event log 9 Logs PIN code Enter a PIN code or select a PIN code channel to protect this log. When the clearing channel’s value changes from False to True. A PIN code is always four digits. see section PIN code channel . the event log channels will be replaced by internal digital channels. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to see this log. A value log item will be created for each event log channel and the internal digital channel will be used as the log condition.PCC on page 142. Clearing channel See section Clearing channel on page 214. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to clear this log. all records in this log will be cleared. for example 0472. NOTE: This function overrides any PIN code or access level protection. No value is logged. IQANdesign User manual 217 . The condition is determined by the function of the event log item. When the value of the function changes from false to true a log record is created with the name of the event log item. For more information see section Measure in other views on page 195.Event log 9 Logs Event log item The event log item logs an event when a certain condition is fulfilled. Measure It is possible to measure log item value and status in the log items view. or select Application > Add > Add Statistics Log. The log can also be added using the toolbar in the log list. right-click on the node Logs in the application manager and select Add Statistics Log in the popup menu. They are a powerful tool to create for example histograms of operating conditions such as temperatures and pressures. Add a statistics log To add a statistics log. a toolbar is available with the log item types that can be added. Properties These are the properties for an statistics log. A list with all log items in the statistics log is shown. In contrast to the event logs the statistics logs does not grow in size when used. Event log channel list. IQANdesign User manual 218 . Select the statistics log in the application manager. Instead there is one log record for each log item. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. Visible Select “Yes” to make this log visible from the master display or IQANrun. Above the log item list.Statistics log 9 Logs Statistics log Statistics logs are used to log different kind of machine statistics. The counter is increased every time its function changes from false to true. Clearing channel See section Clearing channel on page 214. Specify required access level to view this log. A PIN code is always four digits. PIN code Access levels > View Access levels > Clear Clearing channel PIN code For more information. Enter a PIN code or select a PIN code channel to protect this log. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to see this log. or select a channel to enable/disable it in run-time. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to clear this log. see section PIN code channel . NOTE: This function overrides any PIN code or access level protection. Select a channel to clear the log. Users with lower access levels will not be able to clear this log in IQANrun. Counter log item The counter log item adds a counter to the statistics log. When the channel value is “False”. Min and max log items The min and max log items logs the min or max value of a channel as long as the log item’s function evaluates to true. Access levels For more information.Statistics log 9 Logs Enabled Select “Yes” to make this log enabled all the time. see section Access levels on page 271.PCC on page 142. IQANdesign User manual 219 . all records in this log will be cleared. Specify required access level to clear this log. The PIN code has to be entered to view the log records. for example 0472. the log is disabled and will not log any events. Users with lower access levels will not be able to see this log in the master menu system or IQANrun. When the clearing channel’s value changes from False to True. Hour counter log item The hour counter log item evaluates its function and increases a timer as long as the function evaluates to true. Statistics log 9 Logs Properties Channel The min or max value of the selected channel will be stored in the log. IQANdesign User manual 220 . Measure It is possible to measure log item value and status in the log items view. For more information see section Measure in other views on page 195. There is always a default language. The end user can then select the desired language on the master module display. IQANdesign User manual 221 . may need to be presented in several languages.10 Languages Names. as many as you like. menu items and other texts in the application file. and thereafter you add new languages. units. The selected text is also selected in the property inspector. In the text list underneath the language list all your translated texts are shown. master menus when selecting language. Language properties These are the properties for a language component.g. Name Description Caption Name of this language component. Here you can enter new translations by selecting a line and clicking on the text to translate or pressing F2 when the text to change is selected. To delete a language. right-click on the node Languages in the application manager and select Add Language or select Application > Add > Add Language. IQANdesign User manual 222 .Managing application languages 10 Languages Managing application languages The languages in the application together with the translated texts are managed under the Languages node of the application manager. It is normally translated to the language it represents to make it possible to find the entry in the menu without understanding the currently selected language. Language and string list. You can sort the texts by clicking on the headers of the list. To add a new language. Description of the language. The caption is used in e. select the language and select Edit > Delete or right-click and select Delete from the popup menu. IQANdesign User manual 223 . text parameters and other dynamic elements you can enter them here. multiple languages example. You can watch the memory consumption for each language in the application statistics dialog. For the font to be selectable it must be installed in windows. open the property inspector for that channel and click the check box on the right side of the channel’s name. Property inspector. A font is needed if characters other than the ones found in the WGL4 character range are used for a language. This font will not be used for characters within the WGL4 character range. see section Application statistics on page 20. If a font is stated this property determines if the bold version of the font should be included or not. When sending an application you can choose not to download all languages. Extended character set font Include bold Additional characters Adding multi-language texts To add texts in different languages to for instance a channel. If you need additional characters to support e. See section Send application on page 225 and page 282 for detailed information. Once a property is configured to be multi-language it will show up in the string list under the Languages node of the application manager. en-us stands for English (United states).g. but only the ones you need in that particular machine. Excluding the bold characters saves memory in the master module. Memory consumption Adding more languages to your application will consume more memory in the master module.Managing application languages 10 Languages Language code A language code (ISO 639-1) identifying this language and optionally the country (ISO 3166-1). For example. Extra properties for each defined language will now appear underneath the name property. When specifying a font above only the characters used in the application for that language will be included in the font. since the IQAN software has built-in support for these characters. org. Central and Eastern European languages.unicode. see http://www. NOTE If a language is added that requires characters outside the WGL4 subset of unicode. and includes Cyrillic and Greek alphabets.U+00FF U+0100 .Unicode 10 Languages Unicode IQANdesign supports Unicode including asian languages such as Japanese.U+007F U+0080 .U+03FF U+0400 .U+017F U+0370 . The font used by default for the master display supports however only a subset of Unicode called WGL4 (Windows Glyph List 4). Unicode ranges in the WGL4 Character Set Basic Latin Latin-1 Supplement Latin Extended-A Greek Cyrillic U+0020 . IQANdesign will then extract the additional characters needed by the application from the selected font and include them in the application. a font needs to be supplied for that language (see section Language properties on page 222). Korean and Chinese.U+04FF IQANdesign User manual 224 . For more information on Unicode and WGL4. It contains characters that are required for Western. This can be a way to save application memory in the master module. By default all languages are sent and no send language option dialog is shown. especially for asian languages where extra font data needs to be downloaded. ATTENTION When performing a get application or clone from a master without all languages the resulting file will have empty texts for the languages not found in the master.Send application 10 Languages Send application When sending an application it is possible to select which languages to send. Check the languages that you want to send to the master. Send language option dialog. IQANdesign User manual 225 . The dialog can be enabled using in the options dialog Tools > Options under the dialog tab. Export 10 Languages Export To make it easier to translate all texts in an application it is possible to export all texts to an Excel file. all texts visible to the end user. Select Multi-language properties. IQANdesign User manual 226 . These can be found under the Localization property on Display pages. Select File > Export. for example. Select a folder where you want your exported file stored and enter a file name. Export dialog box. see image below. such as menu items. etc.. Remember all the system specific texts.. First. see section Localization on page 235. add all the languages needed in your application. ATTENTION Please do not change columns A to F or rows 1 and 2. A save file dialog box appears. Open the file in Microsoft Excel and change texts in columns G and higher. Click OK to continue. Then check the multi-language check-box for all texts you want to translate. Do not add or delete any rows or columns. dialog boxes. to open the export dialog box. An xls-file is created. IQANdesign User manual 227 .Export 10 Languages Exported channels in Excel. The Excel file has to match your current application.Import 10 Languages Import Select File > Import. If the application id does not match.. Import dialog box. An import dialog box is opened. and select the Excel file that you want to import from. see section Application id on page 25. have the same application id. the file can not be imported. IQANdesign User manual 228 . For more information. The application id is stored in a hidden cell in the Excel file.. that is. All languages that have the same name in the Excel file and the application file are selected by default. Select the languages you want to import. Press OK and you’re done. To use another font.Font selection 10 Languages Font selection When adding Unicode texts in IQANdesign or Microsoft Excel. In Windows XP for example. IQANdesign User manual 229 . see section Dialog options on page 51. you find it in the Start menu under All Programs > Accessories > System Tools. IQANdesign will use Windows font settings by default. that is installed with most Windows versions. A helpful tool to see what character sets a specific font contains is Character Map. you must use a Unicode font that contains the character sets you need. see available literature on the subject. that even if all information is presented at the same time.11 Display pages Display pages are used to design the graphical user interface for the master display that gives the operator. By using several dedicated display pages it is possible to show enough of the correct information in different situations. For further information on how to design operator cabs or driver environments. The difference between this display and a “traditional” operator or driver environment is that all of the information does not necessarily need to always be shown. it is only necessary that the operator notices the most important information. IQANdesign User manual 230 . service personnel and other users necessary information in different situations. Remember. Or. • To add a display page. You can have as many pages as you like. It is important to remember that all images and controls that you add will increase the application file size. A display page for the IQAN-MDL master module with controls. select Application > Add > Add Display Page. In the application manager there is Display pages. Using a display page it is possible to display controls. IQANdesign User manual 231 . texts. You can have as many display pages you want. There is one button for each display page type. How to design a display page in IQANdesign The display pages will belong to the application file. such as images. The visibility of each page can be controlled by a channel and/or by pressing a button on other pages. right click on Display pages in the application manager and select Add Display Page in the pop up menu. • You can also use the tool bar to create a display page.Display pages in IQANdesign 11 Display pages Display pages in IQANdesign A display page is used to design a page for the master display. under which you will find all of your display pages. lines and gauges. the page with lower number will be shown. Rearrange page order The page order is only important if the condition for showing the pages are true for two or more pages at the same time. If you select a page in the list. The default background color is black. The display page will be shown in the editor and the page properties will be shown in the property inspector. shown first. this page is shown. the property inspector will show the properties for the selected page. Then.Display pages in IQANdesign 11 Display pages Application manager and display pages list. The page with the highest order number will be on the top. Click on the actual page in the application manager. read the page description and also check the number of controls that have been added to each page. if the hide condition for that page becomes true. In this view you will be able to rearrange the page order. Open a display page To work with a display page or design it. but that can easily be changed. set this property to "Not used". When channel value changes from 0 or False to something else. IQANdesign User manual 232 . you have to open the page. To show this page only when a button is pressed on another page. Display page properties Show Select "Always" to always show this page or a channel to control visibility in runtime. The New display page will be shown together with the already added pages in the editor. you want a button to have the same function on several pages. open the other page and select. To do that. Or. The color is unique for every page. as the button property.. IQANdesign User manual 233 . All the controls on the base page will be shown on this page. In that case you would design a page for that and use it as a base page on one or more other pages. This property has no effect unless property Show is used. such as logotypes or lamps for example. if you want to choose a color that is not in the list. The condition must be true and the page will be shown or hidden on the rising edge. When channel value changes from 0 or False to something else. Select "Not used" if you don’t want to hide this page. It is also possible to show this page when a display button is pressed on another page. Select a display page to use as a base for this page. NOTE The background color of the base page is not copied to the other pages. If a base page is selected its background color will not affect the background color on the actual page. Maybe you want to have some controls visible on several different pages. As soon as the channel becomes true. (X is the page you want to go to). for example lines or a logotype. Base page To save some designing time it can be a good idea to use a base page as a template for some other pages. the page will be shown or hidden respectively. A typical use for a base page is when you want to have the same set of controls on many pages. Select Custom. The alternative Always means that the page is visible whenever no other page is shown. Base page Color Show and hide pages You must specify when the page shall be shown and when it shall be hidden. You can use a channel to control visibility during operation. Select a background color for this page. this page is hidden. Set Show to Not used on this page. Go to display page X..Display pages in IQANdesign 11 Display pages Hide Select a channel to control when to hide this page in runtime. The localization properties are used to adapt the display information. Reactivation [s] System colors You can select to define unique colors for your application. Select “No” to force the user to acknowledge every system dialog box manually.. The items can be reordered by drag and drop in the property inspector. Dialog boxes are used to display system or user generated messages (IMSG.Properties for all display pages 11 Display pages Properties for all display pages There are some main designing properties that concern all pages including display pages. such as dialog boxes. CMSG). Add items to be displayed on the system info page of the master. or a channel to control deactivation in runtime. Enter a color name and select the color you want. System info System dialog boxes Deactivation Select “Yes” to hide a system generated dialog box when the alarm/error disappears. This could be a company color or if you want to have some special color that is not represented in the default color list. at the top of the list of colors to create a custom defined color.. Properties System dialog boxes System colors Localization Properties for deactivation and reactivation of system dialog boxes. Click to add a system color. The time and date format can be changed. menu system and application information to several languages and places. the menu system and the dialog boxes. Select Custom. Select a time after which a system generated dialog box is reactivated if the user acknowledged it and the alarm/error is still active. The below described properties will be shown if you select Display pages in the application manager. Each item can be a channel or a text and is displayed on a separate row. IQANdesign User manual 234 . Define system colors that you can use in your application. Empty rows can be inserted by adding an item with an empty text. MM.). Localization Time format h = hour. Monday) Example: dd/MMM/yy = 02/Nov/03 See also property “Calendar” below. IMSG. ddd = short name (Jan. s = second. ss = leading zero h. m. Caption Button text Dialog box. d = day y. error. s = no leading zero Example: HH:mm:ss = 15:04:31 y = year. d = no leading zero yy.Properties for all display pages 11 Display pages Properties Name Color Specify a name for this color. dd = leading zero yyyy = 4 digit year MMM. IQANdesign User manual 235 . for example background color of a display page. m = minute. Date format Dialog boxes Menu system Status messages Calendar Dialog boxes The dialog boxes that these properties concern are the boxes that will appear on the display. Information. Mon) MMMM. warning and information messages. etc. M = month. dddd = long name (January. Confirmation. H = 24 hour hh. mm. All texts used in the menu system. such as Message. Captions for dialog boxes (CMSG. Warning etc. The system colors can later be used at all other color properties. Error. t = am or pm h = 12 hour. Weekday and month names. Select a color. M. System info Add items here to be displayed on the system info page on the master display or in IQANrun. It won’t be updated if the channel changes value unless you leave the system info page and enter it again. IQANdesign User manual 236 . NOTE The channel value is static on the system info page.Properties for all display pages 11 Display pages Properties Captions Buttons Define other captions than the default. or define captions in multiple languages. An item can be a text or a channel. Channel items are displayed with the channel name in one column and the value (and unit if applicable) in another column to the right. or define button texts in multiple languages. They are grouped according to menu page. Define other button texts than the default. Change the texts if you need to or add other languages. Menu system These properties concern the texts in the menu system. texts. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. There are nine types of display controls with different functionality. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. bar graphs.Display controls 11 Display pages Display controls A display control is used to present information on the display in a pleasant. Specify a fixed width in pixels. Line control This control is used to draw lines on a display page. Select a color. for example to create dividers or boxes. etc. The alignment will correspond to the "Horizontal position" value. Top Horizontal position Width Alignment IQANdesign User manual 237 . Specify the width of this line in pixels.and Y-axis for this line’s first and second endpoint. dial scales. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the X and Y axis. left. or select "Automatic" to let the width be calculated automatically at runtime. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. values. Y2. X2 Width Color Text control This control is used to display a fixed text on a display page. You will find controls for lines. easy to understand way. Specify alignment of this control. center or right). for example captions. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. X1. image bar graphs. Y1. Enter a position on the X. right or center. Note that the "Alignment" property decides the text control’s reference position (left. image gauges. lamps. either graphical or with text. and sliders. Example: Channel is called “Temperature” with unit “°C” and value 25.Display controls 11 Display pages Text Font > Size Enter the text that you want displayed or select a text channel.2”. Minimum and maximum value for this control. Select a color. There is also two larger numeric font sizes. Select the channel that controls the value of this control. “Medium”. “Large Numeric” and “Huge Numeric”. Specify what type of information to show. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. Select "Yes" to use a bold font.2. Font size. Enabled when property “Show” is “Value” or “Value and unit”. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. “Large” and “Huge”. center or right). You can select “Value”. “Unit”. for example fuel level or the clock. Font > Bold Font > Color Value control This control is used to display a channels value. or select "Automatic" to let the width be calculated automatically at runtime. The values are specified in the same unit as the input channel. Specify a fixed width in pixels. The control will stop at these value even if the input channel value is lower or higher. Choose between “Small”. “Value and unit” or “Name and unit”. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the X and Y axis. Top Horizontal position Width Input channel Min value Max value Show IQANdesign User manual 238 . etc. Note that the "Alignment" property decides the text control’s reference position (left. “Name”. “Name and unit” will show “Temperature [°C]”. “Value” will show “25. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. left. Specify how many digits you want displayed for the input channel’s value. Select "Yes" to use a bold font. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. Alignment Number of digits Number of decimals Font > Size Font > Bold Font > Color Bar graph control This control is used to display a simple bar graph. for example fuel level. Enabled when property “Format” is “Decimal”. right or center. For hexadecimal and binary. Select a color. “Hexadecimal” or “Binary”. Font size. Specify alignment of this control. Only useful when “Input channel” is a numerical value channel and property “Show” is “Value” or “Value and unit”. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. "Medium". Enabled when property “Format” is “Hexadecimal” or “Binary”. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. Border Background Bar Bar graph parts. also define property “Number of digits”. Specify how many decimals you want displayed for the input channel value. "Large" and "Huge".Display controls 11 Display pages Format Specify how you want the value formatted: “Decimal”. IQANdesign User manual Top Left Input channel 239 . Hexadecimal numbers are prefixed with 0x. Choose between "Small". Select the channel that controls the value of this control. The alignment will correspond to the "Horizontal position" value. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the Y and X axis. Minimum and maximum value for this control. The bar graph consists of two images. The values are specified in the same unit as the input channel. Select a color. Specify horizontal or vertical. Select the channel that controls the value of this control. Background color Bar color Border > Visible Border > Color Style > Orientation Style > LED Image bar graph control This control is used to display an advanced bar graph. Select this option if you want the bar graph to have a LED look. one for the background and one for the foreground. Top Left Input channel Min value Max value IQANdesign User manual 240 . Select "Yes" to show a border around the control. The values are specified in the same unit as the input channel. for example 0 respective 200 liters for a tank. Use this control to create a bar graph with your own look and feel. for example 0 and 200 liters for a tank. Select the colors for the two parts respectively.Display controls 11 Display pages Width Height Min value Max value Specify the width and height of the bar in pixels. The bar graph control consists of two parts the background graph and the bar that fills the graph. The control will stop at these values even if the input channel value is lower or higher. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. Minimum and maximum value for this control. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the Y and X axis. The control will stop at these values even if the input channel value is lower or higher. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. It is typically used to present vehicle speed. set the size of the window here. NOTE In our image library. the frames and bars are separated. Image gauge control This control is used to display a gauge with a dial and a needle. fuel level. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time.Display controls 11 Display pages Window To show the foreground image in a sliding window on top of the background image. Remember to use the same frame as background image for best result. set this property to "Not used". Image bar graph at 75% Orientation Background image Foreground image Background image Foreground image Image bar graph at 75% with window size 15 Horizontal image bar graph. To show it as a growing bar. etc. Needle Anchor Dial Image gauge parts. Specify horizontal or vertical. engine speed. We have supplied a couple of examples of merged frames and bars in the image library. IQANdesign User manual Top Left Input channel 241 . Select the images that you want to use as background and foreground. To create the foreground image. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the Y and X axis. select a frame and a bar and merge them in your favorite image editing software. Select the channel that controls the value of this control. Minimum and maximum value for this control. The values are specified in the same unit as the input channel. The image upper left corner is defined as top= 0. Needle length is specified in percent of the longest side of the dial image. 180° equals west. for example 0 and 50 km/h for a speed gauge. etc. for example a company logotype or an icon. Needle > Color Needle > Length Needle > Base width Needle > Tip width Anchor > Center position. clockwise or counterclockwise.Display controls 11 Display pages Clockwise Range > Min angle Max angle Range > Min value Max value Specify direction of rotation. The control will stop at these values even if the input channel value is lower or higher. 0° equals east. 90° equals north. Select the image that you want to use as dial (background). X Center position Y Anchor > Color Anchor > Width Dial image Background image for a gauge dial. left = 0. Select a color for the anchor. The needle angles that corresponds to minimum and maximum values of this gauge. Select a color for the needle. IQANdesign User manual 242 . It is also possible to view one out of many images by the use of an image selector. Anchor position (needle endpoint) on the X and Y axis. Image control This control is used to display an image. The angles are specified in degrees. Needle tip width is expressed in pixels as the excursion to the left and right of the needle base line. Anchor width is specified in pixels. Needle base width is expressed in pixels as the excursion to the left and right of the needle base line. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the Y and X axis. for example a fuel level warning or parking brake indicator. Lamp control This control is used to display a lamp. Select a state channel to use as image selector. One image property for each state will be added to this control. one for the inactive state and one for the active. The upper left corner of the image is defined as top=0 and left=0. NOTE The two images should be of the same size (width and height). otherwise some of the images may be cropped or distorted. Select the image that you want displayed when the corresponding state is active. Enter how many degrees you want to rotate the image clockwise.Display controls 11 Display pages NOTE When using multiple images with an image selector all images should be of the same size (width and height). or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. 0° equals no rotation. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. etc. Top Left Rotate > Angle [°] Rotate > X position Y position Image selector Default image Image 1. The image to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. Enter a pixel value for the center position around which the image should rotate on the X and Y axis. IQANdesign User manual 243 . otherwise one of the images may be cropped or distorted. Select the image that you want displayed by this control. It uses two images. select a channel instead. Off image (dark grey) On image (red) Indication of low battery. 2. To control rotation in run-time. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. Select the channel that controls the value. Select the channel that controls the value of this control. for example 0 and 50 km/h for a speed gauge. Positions are specified as distance in pixels from top left corner. The control will stop at these values even if the input channel value is lower or higher. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the Y and X axis.Display controls 11 Display pages Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. Top Left Input channel Range > Min position Max position Range > Min value Max value Orientation Background image Needle image IQANdesign User manual 244 . The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. Specify horizontal or vertical. Enter a pixel value to position this control on the Y and X axis. The values are specified in the same unit as the input channel. Properties Visible Select "Yes" to make this control visible all the time. Minimum and maximum value for this control. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. The window’s upper left corner is defined as top=0 and left=0. The needle’s min and max position that corresponds to the minimum and maximum values. or select a digital value channel to control visibility at run time. Top Left Input channel Off image On image Slider control This control is used to display a slider. Select the image that you want to represent the off and on state for this control. Select the images that you want to use as background and needle. Display controls 11 Display pages Background image Slider at 75% Needle image Horizontal slider. IQANdesign User manual 245 . Snap to other controls While dragging a control. It means that you can only move the display control vertically or horizontally. The visible grid appears as horizontal and vertical dotted lines in IQANdesign.Design tools 11 Display pages Design tools There are some effective design tools to help you create the display pages and hopefully save some development time. Display pages tab. You don’t have to connect an input channel to it. just click on the Run tool button and all the controls on the page will start to run. open IQANdesign options. center or right justification. Vertical and Horizontal alignment tools You can rearrange the controls by aligning them. Open IQANdesign options. To change the grid spacing. The controls will snap to the grid when it is visible. The dragged control will now snap to other controls on the display page. and select your drag alignment preference. Orthogonal alignments You can move and position a control orthogonally. The X and Y spacing can be set to your preferences. Display pages tab. Run When you have added a display control to a display page you can do a simple and fast test of how the control will look when you run the application. to align several text and value controls. Center or Right aligning tool buttons. NOTE The Text and Value controls have a property called Alignment. IQANdesign User manual 246 . this alignment property can have an affect. That property will change the controls horizontal reference position to left. Press the <Shift>-button and move the control with the mouse. You can align the controls in a vertical line by selecting one of the Left. And you can align the controls in a horizontal line by selecting one of the Top. When you then use the above alignment tool. but not in the application sent to the master. Grid You can select to show a grid to help you draw and align controls. press the <Ctrl>-button and click on the controls. press <Ctrl>. To select the display controls that you want to align. Center or Bottom align tool buttons. press the <Ctrl>-button and select the controls. IQANdesign User manual 247 . Options There are some IQANdesign options that affects the display page design. Display pages options. The Drag alignment option specifies how the controls snap to each other when dragged with the <Ctrl> key pressed. Enter grid spacing on the X and Y axis. For more information. Select Tools > Options and switch to the Display pages tab in the dialog box that pops up. see section Grid on page 246.Design tools 11 Display pages Horizontal and vertical distribution You can move controls and distribute them so they have an equal amount of space between them. Select the distribution direction you want. Select the controls. horizontally or vertically. Check Show grid to get the grid in the background of your display pages. You can distribute the controls horizontally or vertically. To select many buttons. Buttons that have a function are highlighted. You find display button and jog shuttle properties when you select one or many display buttons. Button layout for an IQAN-MD3. that can be used to select pages. VDIN. There are three functions dedicated to the Jog shuttle.CMSG on page 138 and section Interactive message . Some display modules have a Jog shuttle. except the ones used for controlling the dialog box. Selected buttons are marked with a white circle. click each button while pressing <Ctrl>. turn counter clockwise or push. NOTE If there is a dialog box visible (conditional.IMSG on page 141. You can also use the buttons in a “function” in the application. adjust values or select value parameters in a list etc. turn clockwise. See also section Conditional message .Display buttons 11 Display pages Display buttons The master module display has display buttons placed around the display that can be used to show another page. Select a button by clicking on it. IQANdesign User manual 248 . activate a function or an adjust page etc. interactive or system message). If you want to control a function in the application you have to use a Virtual digital input channel. all display page buttons will be disabled. “None” does not display any adjust control at all. Action selector Select a state channel to use as action selector. “Menu system” displays the normal menu system page for the selected adjust item. One action property for each state will be added to this button. “On screen” and “Miniature” does not work for adjust items with multiple parameters. Note 2: This property is enabled when one or more action properties are referring to an adjust item. The user can read this text by pressing this button. such as current outputs or voltage inputs. “Miniature” displays the adjust control in a small window in the lower right corner of the display. and highlight that control.Display buttons 11 Display pages Button properties Enabled Adjust display The button has to be enabled if you want to use it on this display page. IQANdesign User manual 249 . “On screen” will search for a control on the current page that uses the same channel as the selected adjust item. The action to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. Select how you want the adjust control displayed. Help context Enter a descriptive text. Note 1: Options “None”. Note: This property is enabled when property Action is set to “Help”. . VDIN. Action 1. Select a display page to go to that page when button is pressed.. To connect a display button to a VDIN. the connected VDIN channel will reflect the button value. Select “Close page” to close this page when button is pressed. One action property per state is created when property Action selector is used. Select an adjust item to display that item when button is pressed. Use a virtual digital channel to control a function in the application There is a channel type called Virtual digital in. Select a log to display that log when button is pressed. See also property “Adjust display” below. Select an adjust group to display that group when button is pressed. Escape button properties Enabled The button has to be enabled if you want to use it on this display page. See also property “Help context” below. Same function as property Default action. Select “Help” to display help when button is pressed. This channel type will represent the display button in the application file. See section Virtual digital in VDIN on page 147 for more information. Select “No” to disable the menu button on this page. 2. Menu button properties Enabled The button has to be enabled if you want to use it on this display page.. Select a measure group to display that group when button is pressed. When the display page is visible and the button is pressed. Select a virtual digital in channel to control that channel’s value when button is pressed. Select a measure group to display that group when button is pressed. set the Enabled property to Yes for the actual button and select the Virtual digital in channel as the Action property.Display buttons 11 Display pages Default action Select “No action” to disable this function. IQANdesign User manual 250 . . select a virtual digital in channel to control that channel’s value when the jog shuttle is pushed. Select “No action” to disable this function. Select “No action” to disable this function.. Select the display page or adjust item that you want to go to when the jog shuttle is turned clockwise. One action property for each state will be added to this button.Display buttons 11 Display pages Action selector Select a state channel to use as action selector.. 2. Same function as property Default action. Select “No action” to disable this function. Same function as property Default action. The action to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. Select “Close page” to close the page when button is pressed. Default action Action 1. Select “No action” to disable this function.. Jog shuttle properties Enabled Adjust display Action selector The button has to be enabled if you want to use it on this display page. Select a state channel to use as action selector. Select a virtual digital in channel to control that channel’s value when button is pressed. Select the display page or adjust item that you want to go to when the jog shuttle is turned counter-clockwise. Select a display page to go to that page when button is pressed. 2. . IQANdesign User manual 251 . One action property per state is created when property Action selector is used. One action property per state is created when property Action selector is used. Select the display page or adjust item that you want to go to or. Default action > Clockwise turn Default action > Counterclockwise turn Default action > Push Action 1. One action property for each state will be added to this button. . The action to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. See page 249. Select “No action” to disable this function. See page 249.. One action property per state is created when property Action selector is used. IQANdesign User manual 252 . For further information. The action to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. .. 2. 2.. Default action Action 1. see section Adjust groups on page 206. Select the display page or adjust item that you want to go to or. Select a state channel to use as action selector. Enter button properties Enabled Adjust display Action selector The button has to be enabled if you want to use it on this display page. See page 249. One action property for each state will be added to this button. To be able to select an adjust item in the channel list. Default action Action 1. This can be very useful if you want to adjust a value often. Select to adjust an item or value with the jog shuttle or up/down buttons To make it easier to adjust a channel value in the master it can be a good idea to have a shortcut to that channel’s value instead of using the normal path via the menu system. Same function as property Default action. One action property per state is created when property Action selector is used. Same function as property Default action.Display buttons 11 Display pages Up/Down button properties Enabled Adjust display Action selector The button has to be enabled if you want to use it on this display page. Select “No action” to disable this function. The action to be used is decided by the value of the state channel. you need to first make the actual channel adjustable and then add the channel to an adjust group. select a virtual digital in channel to control that channel’s value when button is pressed. Select a state channel to use as action selector. .. One action property for each state will be added to this button. select a virtual digital in channel to control that channel’s value when button is pressed. Select the display page or adjust item that you want to go to or. Position 0 is left-most respective top-most pixel on the display. IQAN-MDL The table below specifies the pixel position of each button center for an IQAN-MDL module. Position 0 is left-most respective top-most pixel on the display.Display buttons 11 Display pages Button positions. IQAN-MD3 The table below specifies the pixel position of each button center for an IQAN-MD3 module. Pixel positions F1 F2 F3 F4 Up Enter Down 35 120 205 290 60 120 180 IQANdesign User manual 253 . Pixel positions F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC A B C D Menu 24 102 180 258 336 392 7 55 103 152 200 Button positions. one image group for all the symbol images and another for instrumentation images. in the property inspector. you have to add the images to the application file. Create an image group To be able to apply the images to the display controls. IQANdesign User manual 254 . For example. The purpose of an image group is to help create a better overview of all images in the application file. such as image group name etc. a folder will be created under My Documents\IQAN Applications called Image Library. When you have added or created an image group it is possible to add images to that group. A good idea is to have several image groups with different purposes instead of one large group that contains all the images. In this folder you can find a lot of different images for lamps. Images included in the IQANdesign installation When you install IQANdesign on your computer. This will give you an better overview and make it easier to find a specific image. The first thing you have to do is to create the image groups that will contain all the images.Images and Image groups 11 Display pages Images and Image groups Images are stored in image groups in the application. Image groups. gauges. You have to add one or more image groups before you can add any images to the application. By using these images you will also fulfill the SAE standard for dashboard symbols.. or select Application > Add > Add Image Group. These images are designed to give your application a professional look and feel. • Right click on Images in the application manager and select Add Image Group in the pop up menu. Application manager. Enter the properties. etc. Images and Image groups 11 Display pages NOTE All the added images will increase the size of the application file and will also be downloaded to the master. it will not be updated in your application file. Images displayed in the editor. all pixels with that color will be transparent. The image will then appear in the image group. The top left pixel color is used as transparent color. if you edit an image. To update to the new image. The file format must be bitmap (. • To add an image to an image group. in the pop up menu.. Before you download the application check that the image groups don’t contain any unused images that will occupy unnecessary memory space in the master. IQANdesign User manual 255 . • Select the image file you want to add in the dialog box shown. as a thumbnail.bmp) or JPEG (..jpg). The image and all controls using it are updated. Add images to an image group When you have created an image group it is possible to add images to that group. together with the other images in the editor. Select the updated image in the dialog box that is shown and click OK. The images are embedded in the application file. and it will be presented. not linked. that is. right-click the image in IQANdesign and select Replace Image in the popup menu. The default name will be the file name without an extension. Therefore. right click on the image group and select Add Image. Rename it to whatever you want. Image properties Transparent Select “Yes” to make this image transparent. Select an image to use as dial in the property inspector. IQANdesign User manual 256 . to a display page. Add an image control. property Dial image. for example an image gauge.Images and Image groups 11 Display pages Assigning images to controls After importing images to your application you can assign an image to a control. that is. • Select the desired image. By default this is a Parker logo image. but you can easily change it to another image. a start up image will be displayed for a short period of time before the first display page will be shown. You can see how the start up image looks in IQANsimulate or in the master module. If you want another color.Start up image 11 Display pages Start up image When the master restarts after power off. To change the start up image • Begin with adding the start up image to an image group. please add a line of pixels with your desired color at the top of your start up image before importing it into your application. You will find the Start up image as a property in the property inspector. the Parker logo will be displayed. the area surrounding the start up image. • Select Images in the application manager. IQANdesign User manual 257 . The image is centered both vertically and horizontally on the screen. The color of the top left pixel in the start up image will be used as background color for the rest of the screen. If you select Not used. Example: You have selected an image group. Logs are not exported. Modules Measure groups Adjust groups Logs Modules are not exported.. Then. Click OK to continue. • To export only the selected components (with their content). First.Export 11 Display pages Export It is possible to export one or more display pages/image groups to a separate file and later import them to another application. select the display pages or image groups that you want to export. • To export referenced components also. Adjust groups are not exported. IQANdesign User manual 258 . to open the export dialog box. click Selected component(s) without references and then click OK. Function groups/Channels Function groups and channels are not exported. select File > Export. Selected component(s) with references Same as above. The image group with all its contained images will be exported. Selected component(s) without references Components with content are exported.. Measure groups are not exported. click Selected component(s) with references instead. but referenced components are also exported. Export dialog box. A save file dialog box appears. Select a folder where you want your exported file stored and enter a file name. Images that refer to any of the above exported components are exported. Access levels are not exported.Export 11 Display pages Pages Images Security Other pages than the selected are not exported. IQANdesign User manual 259 . For more information about export and import see section Export/Import on page 69. IQANdesign User manual 260 . This chapter will describe how to protect your application files and also how to protect settings and other data stored in your machines.12 Security There are several levels of security to protect your applications and machines. such as IQANrun. open the application password dialog box. It is not possible to have a limited access password and no full access password. In the dialog box you will be notified if the application file is protected or not. The limited access password prevents unauthorized users from opening the application file with other software tools. Adding password protection To protect the application file with a password. • Click on the Change button. The first access level is the Full access password. When opening an application in such a tool. one for Full access and one for Limited access.Application password 12 Security Application password The application password will prevent unauthorized people from opening your application or getting it from the master. IQANdesign User manual 261 . There are two types of access to your application. • Enter the password twice and click OK. Select the one you want. The second access level is the Limited access password. Application > Passwords. Full access password tab. the user will only be able to view it or send it to a master module. There are two tabs. The Limited access password will always be required when opening an application in any other tool than IQANdesign. This password prevents unauthorized users from opening the application file in IQANdesign and thereby changing it in any way. See section Safe password on page 267 for more information on safe passwords.Application password 12 Security No full access password. Change or remove a password Change or remove the password by clicking on the change button. This means that a user can have an encrypted safe password that he stores on his computer. IQANdesign User manual 262 . which allows him to open and use your application file. First you have to enter the old password. Safe passwords In IQANdesign it is also possible to generate so called safe passwords. The idea behind this type of safe password is that the user doesn’t need to know your password and the application file may only be opened on the one computer that you have enabled with the safe password. Then. you may enter a new password or leave the lines empty if you don’t want to have an application password. There are two types available in IQANdesign. they will get their own password database. Name Type The name of the application that this password is connected to. There is a password manager that lets you manage your passwords. If someone else logs in to the same computer. Only you will have access to the passwords. In the password manager you can see your public key and a list of all your passwords. You can sort the list by clicking the different column headers. Password manager.Password database 12 Security Password database The password database stores one or many passwords on your computer. Password type. Full access password and Component password. Passwords stored in the database can not be copied or moved to another user or computer. IQANdesign User manual 263 . Start the password manager by selecting Tools > Password Manager. The password list has four columns. which means they will only be valid until a certain date. When the valid date has been passed. the password will no longer work.Password database 12 Security Comment Id Additional password details. The password manager will detect such attempts and lock the password completely if necessary. Component password Used to unlock protected components. The date is displayed in the comment for date restricted passwords. IQANdesign deals with two file types that can be password protected with full access password. The id of the application that this password is connected to. ATTENTION Please don’t try to change the clock in your PC to get around a date restriction. in files with the same id as the component password. Full access password Full access passwords are used when opening a protected file with the same id as the full access password. The component id is shown in comments. See section Locked function groups on page 64 for more information on locked components. such as function groups. Password types There are two password types available in IQANdesign. IQANdesign User manual 264 . the old one will be replaced. If you add the same password again. applications and clone files. Full access password and Component password. Date restrictions Passwords can be date restricted. There can only be one full access password per id in the database. When your request has been granted. click Copy to copy it to Windows clipboard and then paste it where you like. When you exit IQANdesign. you don’t have to enter the password again. you probably turned it off by selecting the check box Never show this again. for instance by e-mail. Add password question. To enter the public key in some other software. To add it to your password database. The safe password is just a long string of characters. Temporary passwords remain in the database as long as IQANdesign is running. The text (Temporary) is added to the comment for temporary passwords. click on the Add Safe button. Select the check box next to Add password in the list and click OK. If you click No. The public key can be found above the password list in the password manager dialog. the password is added to the database anyway but only temporary. To get it back. IQANdesign User manual 265 . This means that if you open a file with the same id and password during the same IQANdesign session. You do that by sending the administrator a message. Click Yes to store the password. Enter the password in the dialog box that appears and click OK. The password is stored and will be used automatically when IQANdesign detects the need for it next time. Click Send as Mail to create a new message in your e-mail software with the public key in it. you will be asked whether you want to add the password to your database. There are also two buttons available. you will receive a safe password in return. you must first receive it from your password administrator. If you don’t see the dialog Add password.Add password 12 Security Add password Whenever you enter a password for a protected file or component. Add the e-mail address for the administrator and a request for a password in the message. Safe passwords To add a safe password to the database. with your public key and a request for the password you need. all temporary passwords are removed. go to Tools > Options and select tab Show again. and then send it. The safe password is added to your password database and appears in the password list.Add password 12 Security Add safe password dialog box. Check the password list to verify that you received the correct password with the access you need. IQANdesign User manual 266 . The encrypted password must be put into their database. Note that the software name for the public key is shown. Select the type of safe password to generate. In IQANdesign there are functions that help you generate so-called safe passwords. The safe password is unique and is generated from two parts. for example service personnel or other users. First open the application file that you want to give the other user access to and then select Tools > Create safe password from the menu. Enter the public key you just received in the edit box Recipient’s public key. Only that specific user will be able to use the safe password. Create safe password When you have received the Public key it is your turn. The idea with this safe password is that you don’t have to inform anyone of your passwords. they cannot enter the encrypted safe password in a standard password dialog box to open your application file or access protected information. The user always works with the encrypted safe password. This means that you can generate an encrypted password that only gives a user access to open your application file or access the locked components on their specific computer. Public key Instruct the remote user to start the IQAN software that he needs the password for on his actual computer (the computer where the user needs to have access to the application file) and select Password Manager in the Tools menu. IQANdesign User manual 267 . your application id/password and their public key. The public key is generated by a user’s licence number and unique information from their computer. Create a safe password There are three steps to generate a safe password.Safe password 12 Security Safe password Sometimes you need to give other people access to your application. This is the software where the remote user can use the safe password. • The new safe password needs to be stored in the user’s password database. You can also grant access to locked components as well as access levels and master login. no one else. • You need to have the user’s public key. • The safe password is generated from the user’s public key and the original password. Select to either mail the public key to your computer or just copy and paste it where you want it. To grant the user view access to items protected by an access level you also need to select the access level to give access to in the drop down menu. for example IQANrun. If you want to grant the user view access to the whole application (except locked components) you need to check the Allow application viewing checkbox. physical I/O and unprotected logs. Select which component to grant access to in the drop down menu. • Component password gives the user access to a locked component such as a locked function group. but then only with viewing access. • Limited access password gives the user access to open your application in another program such as IQANrun or IQANscript. It can also be used by other programs. IQANdesign User manual 268 . The user can view certain information in your application such as modules.Safe password 12 Security Generate safe password. • Full access password gives the user full access to your application in IQANdesign. see image below. Enter the corresponding password in the password edit box. Click Create to create a safe password based on your selections. IQANdesign User manual 269 . Check the checkbox for valid until and enter the date for the last day that the safe password should be valid. Enter the username to grant login rights for in the edit box under user login.Safe password 12 Security • User login makes it possible for a user to login to a master module without knowing the password. If you want to restrict the safe password in time. Restrictions tab of the safe password dialog. select the Restrictions tab. The safe password is displayed in a separate dialog box. Store the safe password in the user’s database The safe password must be added to the database on the other user’s computer. It is now possible to access the granted resource on that user’s computer without entering the corresponding password. Instruct him to open the Password Manager on his computer and click Add Safe.Safe password 12 Security Created safe password. or use Copy to copy it to Windows clipboard. IQANdesign User manual 270 . Send the safe password back to the user by clicking Send as Mail. Enter the safe password that he received from you and select OK to store the password in the database. You can define as many access levels as you need. or select Application > Add > Add Access Level. Access level description. All your access levels are found in the application manager. The root access level can not be deleted or changed. Add an access level To add an access level. The highest access level is called Root and has order 0 (zero). under the node Security. It is used by the superuser. Drag and drop your access levels in the list to change their order. but other users can also have this access level. Select it to view a list of all your access levels in the editor. Name Description Access level name. for example.Access levels 12 Security Access levels Access levels are used to define what users can see or do in your machines. Properties These are the properties for an access level component. We recommend that you sort on the column Order when you are rearranging your access level order. Click a column header to change the list’s sort order. right-click on the node Security in the application manager and select Add Access Level in the popup menu. Access level list. IQANdesign User manual 271 . “Production” or “Service personnel”. Such users are called administrator users. Administrator users Other users can also create and manage users. you have to log in to the master module with a user that has sufficient access level for your task. Add a user Expand the node Security in the application manager and locate the access level that you want to add a new user to. The superuser will always have the highest access level possible. right-click on the access level and select Add User in the popup menu.Users 12 Security Users Each user is connected to a certain access level. Administrator users can only create and manage users with lower access levels than themselves. These users are created by using IQANrun. It is also possible to add machine specific users. To get access to protected settings. These users are the same for all machines and can typically be generic users such as production and service. defined in your application. logs. To add a user. IQANrun is a software that has the ability to log in to a master module. Properties These are the properties for user component. IQANdesign User manual 272 . the superuser. Its password is specified in the application and will therefore be the same in all your machines that use that application. etc. see IQANrun User Manual for more information. This user is only intended for creation and management of other users and should not be used otherwise. but they will all have the same set of access levels. The application can contain users connected to the different access levels. Administrator rights can be specified when creating a new user. Select the user Superuser under the access level Root in the application manager and enter desired password in the property inspector.. Superuser One user will always exist in every machine. This means that different machines can have different users. User names are case sensitive. so make sure you use a capital S when logging in as this user. The user can see or do everything that is protected by the same or lower access level. NOTE The user name for the superuser is Superuser. g. A numeric value that will be associated with the user. have the possibility to add and change other users. The password of the user. The username of the user. IQANdesign User manual 273 . for example.Users 12 Security Name Description Username Password Administrator Tag User component name. The value can be used in e. i. “Production” or “Service”. States if the user will be an administrator. the system output channel to get the tag of currently logged on user.e. User description. To access these properties. Security properties These are the security properties that are common for an application. The security related properties will let you control what the users can see or do with your application in a machine. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to update applications. Access levels > Change machine id Access levels > Update application Access levels > Send settings NOTE It is strongly recommended that you define a superuser password for your application. Specify required access level to send settings to a machine. view logs. Most of them are access levels for different operations. etc. otherwise your machines will be totally unprotected. make sure that you have defined both full and limited access passwords for your application. Users with lower access level will not be allowed to change the machine id. select Security in the application manager. Also. Users with lower access level will not be allowed to send settings. This password can only be changed in the master module by downloading a new application with another superuser password. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to send settings. Users with lower access level will not be allowed to update application. Without these it is possible to get the application from a IQANdesign User manual 274 . Superuser password Enter superuser password for this application. Note: This property only affects application updates from IQANrun. Anyone can manage users and change any setting in the machine. such as change settings. IQANdesign can always be used to update application regardless of users and access levels. Note: Some settings may be protected by a higher access level.Application security 12 Security Application security There are some properties that affect application security. Select “Allow all” to allow all users to change machine id. To update these settings you must first log in to a user with sufficient access level. Specify required access level to change machine id. Specify required access level to update the application in a machine. Application security 12 Security master module and change the superuser password. For more information, see section Application password on page 261. Component properties There are properties on the different components in your application that affect security. Here is a list of component types that have security related properties. Measure groups Adjust groups Logs View access level. Access level for view/adjust and set factory default value. View access level and clear access level. IQANdesign User manual 275 13 Simulation To simulate your application you need to install IQANsimulate on your computer. IQANsimulate is a very useful tool that helps to assure the functionality of your application before you download the file to the master. It is also very easy to check a function if you are unsure of its behavior. Another benefit is that if your application contains a display module you don’t have to download your application file to check your display pages, display controls or menu system. The application file will appear exactly the same way in the simulator as in the real master module. Use the mouse to click on the display buttons or to turn the jog shuttle. For details on IQANsimulate refer to the IQANsimulate user manual. IQANdesign User manual 276 IQANsimulate synchronization 13 Simulation IQANsimulate synchronization IQANdesign and IQANsimulate both have features that allow you to control a simulation from either user interface. IQANdesign controlling IQANsimulate IQANsimulate can be controlled remotely by IQANdesign. The Start, Stop, Pause and Step functions are available in IQANdesign main menu and main tool bar. Input values can be controlled from IQANdesign with the help of sliders in IQANdesign’s function group view. Slider controlling the input values from IQANdesign. When starting a simulation from IQANdesign, it will first start IQANsimulate if it is not already running, then send the application file currently opened in IQANdesign to IQANsimulate. If IQANsimulate does not have any simulation file opened, it will start simulating immediately using the application file sent by IQANdesign. If a simulation file is already opened, IQANsimulate will first check if the simulation file matches the id of the application sent from IQANdesign. If not, you have to decide if you want to open another simulation file or create a new empty file. Application mismatch warning. After making sure the application matches the simulation file, IQANsimulate will update the simulation file with the new application and then start the simulation. IQANsimulate controlling IQANdesign When controlling the simulator from IQANsimulate, IQANdesign is synchronized so its simulate menu items and tool bar buttons are enabled/disabled accordingly. This synchronization will only work if the simulation was started from IQANdesign. IQANdesign User manual 277 14 System communication This chapter will present the steps necessary to transfer applications to and from the master. Whenever an application is sent to the master, an application check is performed before the transfer starts. If any errors are found the application can not be sent. Hints and warnings returned by the checking procedure will not prevent sending the application to the master. However, it is recommended that all the warnings be fixed before sending the application. Transfer of application data can be done via a serial port, USB, CAN or a modem. IQANdesign User manual 278 Options 14 System communication Options Before transferring data between the PC and the IQAN system, you need to set up your communication options. Select Tools > Options and select the Communication tab in the dialog box. When you have connected the PC with the IQAN system, a green status lamp lights up in the IQANdesign status bar to indicate that the connection is OK. If the lamp is not green you may need to select a different communication port. Select communication port and modem type. USB The USB drivers are installed automatically the first time you connect a master module to your PC. IQANdesign User manual 279 Options 14 System communication ATTENTION Make certain to use a USB isolator when using the USB port. Failure to do so may result in damage to your PC's USB port(s). For more information, see the instruction book for your master module. CAN To use CAN as communication device you need a CAN adapter attached to your PC. For a list of supported CAN adapters, see the software data sheet or contact Parker support. IQANdesign can connect using the first available CAN adapter or you can select a specific CAN adapter in the options dialog box. When using CAN, please make sure there is no other traffic (ICP, SAE J1939, etc) on the bus you are using for diagnostics, otherwise the functionality can not be guaranteed. If there are multiple master modules connected to the same CAN bus, you will be asked which one you want to connect to when you start to communicate. Module selection dialog. If you want to switch to another module, select Communication > Disconnect CAN and then start to communicate again to get the module selection dialog box. Serial port This requires a standard RS-232 serial port on your PC. Also select which COM port to use. IQANdesign User manual 280 Options 14 System communication Simulator Select this device to communicate with IQANsimulate instead of a real master module. make sure you use the same port in both programs. IQANsimulate needs to be started on the same PC and running a simulation for this communication to work. The programs will communicate over a TCP/IP port. IQANdesign User manual 281 . Modem Select a modem in the list. The modem you are planning to use must first be installed by Windows. Follow the instructions provided by the modem manufacturer for more information on the installation procedure. If you must change port number. Port number defaults to 8325 in both IQANrun and IQANsimulate and should not be changed. For more information see section Send application on page 225. Select your options and click OK to start sending. The shortcut key for sending an application is F11. the master module will automatically be restarted. Continue sending by clicking the Send button in the dialog box. see section Dialog options on page 51 for more information. see section Application check on page 17. The application will now be checked for errors and the result will be displayed in a dialog box.Send application 14 System communication Send application Select System > Send Application or click on the Send Application button in the tool bar. Enable send dialog boxes in Tools > Options. For more information. If enabled. click Cancel. a dialog box asking for options regarding settings is displayed. Sending application. ATTENTION When sending an application to the master. When the application has been sent. see section Send application on page 204. Abort transmission If the transmission has to be stopped. A dialog for selecting which languages to send will also be displayed if enabled. first make sure the machine is not moving and the engine is shut down. For more information. Select which languages to send and click OK to start sending. IQANdesign User manual 282 . Status is shown during the send operation by a progress bar. The shortcut key for getting data is <Shift>+F11. Getting application. see section Dialog options on page 51 for more information.Get application 14 System communication Get application Before getting an application from the master. IQANdesign User manual 283 . see section Get application on page 205. Select your options and click OK to start sending. If enabled. Abort transmission If the transmission has to be stopped. Enable dialog box in Tools > Options. Status is shown during the get operation by a progress bar. click Cancel. a dialog box asking for options regarding settings is displayed. Getting an application from the master Select System > Get Application or click on the Get Application button in the tool bar. For more information. be sure all connections between the PC and the master are completed. Set date and time 14 System communication Set date and time Select System > Set Date and Time to set the real time clock in the connected master module. IQANdesign User manual 284 . Date and time adjusted successfully. The actual date and time set in your PC will be used. follow installation instructions that come with the modem. Connect via modem In the Communication menu you will find the command for connecting via modem. you can communicate with a remote IQAN system.Modem connection 14 System communication Modem connection By connecting a modem to your PC. Connect via modem dialog box. IQANdesign User manual 285 . Click Dial to connect to the remote modem. • Select an entry from the phone book list. Start by installing the modem to your PC. It is possible to send and get applications.. measure and do all the things you can do with a local system. Select the modem you want to use in the IQANdesign options dialog box under the Communications tab.. Select Communication > Connect via Modem. Before attempting to communicate with a remote system it is a good idea to verify that a modem is connected to the remote system master. and do one of the following: • Enter the phone number of the remote modem to be called in the text field Telephone number. • Select a previously dialled number in the drop down list Telephone number. click Cancel.Modem connection 14 System communication Once communication is initiated the text in the dialog box will keep you informed with the progress of the call: dialing. Disconnect When you are ready. etc. IQANdesign User manual 286 . Abort transmission If the connection has to be stopped. connecting. disconnect the modem connection by selecting Communication > Disconnect modem. The dialog box shown in the previous section (page 285) is displayed.Phone book 14 System communication Phone book There is a simple phone book available to help you keep track of all your machines and their phone numbers.. Each record in the phone book stores these fields: • Name • Company • Machine id • Location • Phone number • Comment To access the phone book. Each record is displayed on its own row and each field in a separate column. All fields are optional. Add To add a new record in the phone book. select Communication > Connect via Modem.. A new phone book record dialog box appears. Enter record data in the fields and click OK to store the record.. The contents of the phone book is displayed in the list view in the middle. Clicking the same column once more reverses the sort order. but you should at least enter a phone number. IQANdesign User manual 287 . You can sort the list by clicking the column header that corresponds the field you want to sort on. for obvious reasons. Phone book record dialog box. click the button Add. The phone book record dialog box appears. Delete To delete a record in the phone book. Click Yes to delete the record. click Import. Select a folder and enter a file name for the file where you want your records stored. IQANdesign User manual 288 . Select the file that you want to import. Delete record confirmation. Export To be able to share your phone book with others or move it to another computer there is an export function. All records in the phone book are exported. select the record in the list view and click the button Edit. Click Export and a save dialog box appears. Change one or more fields and click OK to store your changes. select the record in the list view and click the button Delete. An open file dialog box appears. Import To import previously exported records.Phone book 14 System communication Edit To edit a record in the phone book. A confirmation dialog box appears. All the records in the file are imported. Also. use an analog line. you'll see “Win modem” or “RPI” somewhere on the box.. We recommend using external modems This is simply the best way to ensure you get a modem with all its brains intact.. see Remote diagnostics. We recommend using direct lines . offload some of the “smarts” of the modem to the host computer. How can you tell if a modem is a software modem? Usually. The guidelines presented here concerns the modems you connect on your PC side.Choosing a modem 14 System communication Choosing a modem Here are some general guidelines we can offer. power and so on). otherwise known as software modems. it's not practical to produce an external modem that uses drivers to handle things like error correction and compression. As far as we know. If you have to go through the company switchboard. these modems have a couple advantages – the drivers are easy to update. Shifting these duties to software results in an overall loss of efficiency (custom hardware is better suited to handle this type of processing). They seldom work well with GSM modems. data bus. An external modem is also easier to monitor and troubleshoot (most have status indicator lights on the front panel). They use software drivers to handle things like compression and error correction that are normally handled by the hardware/firmware in the modem. and the overall cost of the modem is lowered (the whole concept of a software modem probably came about as a result of the competition in the modem market). In our view software modems have several disadvantages. It often takes a little while to get new features reliable IQANdesign User manual 289 . To be fair. these are only general guidelines. not the modems you connect to the IQAN master module. We also have a couple of modems that follow all the rules and are problematic. We recommend avoiding Winmodems and RPI modems These modems. Remember. For IQAN modem recommendations. Catalogue HY17-8372/ UK. but also memory. We have several modems in our lab that break one or more of these guidelines and still work fine. make sure the switchboard doesn’t do any noise reduction on the line you will be using. and not going through the company switchboard. for example: The host computer is forced to donate resources in support of the communications session (not only the CPU. We recommend against “chasing the latest technology” Modem makers often race to hit the market first with a new feature in order to gain market share. Make sure that both modems have SIM cards from the same network operator.... The odds seem to be a bit better if you stick to an established brand. If you're going to be buying a couple hundred modems. We recommend getting a modem with the features you need . We recommend using well-known brands It's tough to know for sure if the maker of your modem will still be around in a year or two in the event you need a new driver or support for your modem. try using a GSM modem on the PC side as well. Buy from a store with a reasonable return policy This should allow you to test the modem in the environment you'll be using. If nothing else works . make sure you're getting modems that will work well in your situation. if you need a modem strictly for data communication. In other words. buy one or two first and test them thoroughly with the code you'll be using before committing the money for all of them. but there's a certain “less can go wrong” issue also. If you need to buy many modems for a project . and no more. why get a voice modem? This is a cost saving recommendation for the most part... IQANdesign User manual 290 . so the first few batches of modems sporting a brand new feature often aren't as reliable as subsequent batches will be.Choosing a modem 14 System communication though.. This only makes sense. a well designed IQAN application is readable and understandable.15 Coding guidelines IQANdesign is a tool that gives the designer great freedom in designing functionality for control of mobile hydraulic applications. robust to errors and always produce the expected output. This chapter describes general guidelines for implementation of IQANdesign applications. but most of these guidelines can be taken as advice for all types of applications. This flexibility also means that there are different ways of implementing the intended machine function. IQANdesign User manual 291 . But not all methods are good designs. Applying coding guidelines is of great importance when implementing safety functions. General guidelines 15 Coding guidelines General guidelines These are general guidelines that improve the readability of an IQANdesign application. Characteristics of a well designed application file Naming conventions Documentation Architecture Layout Calculation order Application check Types Use readable names Use description Use function groups of limited size Inputs to left, outputs to right No unintentional priority warnings No errors/warnings Avoid unnecessary casting (e.g. dual object used in IDC) Naming conventions The best way to document the application file is to use descriptive names. Names should be unique. Even though it is allowed by IQANdesign, two channels should not have exactly the same name; then more descriptive names are needed. Also see section Naming channels on page 88. Naming of digital channels Digital channels, e.g. DIN or IDC, should have names that describe the active state of the channel, where you can read the name as a true false/statement. EXAMPLE A proximity switch that is used to detect if the cab door is closed, could have a name like: • Sw Door closed Bad examples are “door switch”, “proxy 1” or “DIN-A”. If a pair of normally open and normally closed sensors are used (NO/NC), then good names could be: • Sw Door closed • Sw Door open IQANdesign User manual 292 General guidelines 15 Coding guidelines EXAMPLE An IDC that is used to check that a start-up condition, where the value true means that the condition is met, could be named: • Start up OK • Start up safe • Crane start up OK Bad examples are “Start up safety”, “IDC start check” or “New Internal Digital”. Naming of operator controls Operator controls should be named after their location, or after the function that they control. EXAMPLE Input from a coordinate joystick could be named: • JS Right X Or if the joystick only control the boom function • JS Boom If the boom can be controlled with a radio remote, a suitable name for that input may be: • RR Boom Naming of sensor inputs For analog inputs that provide a measurement, name the channel to describe what is measured. EXAMPLE A PT sensor that measures hydraulic oil temperature could be named: • Hyd. oil temp • Hydraulic oil temperature Avoid names such as “temp”, “tempsensor” or “VIN-A”. Use of abbreviations When using abbreviations, such as temp for temperature, it is important to use the same abbreviation throughout the entire application. Using different abbreviations for the same word only causes confusion. IQANdesign User manual 293 General guidelines 15 Coding guidelines Documentation Use description. For functions where the name of a channel alone is not sufficient to understand the functionality, add a description to that channel. EXAMPLE Bucket function with description. Architecture Organize applications in function groups that are oriented around a set of functions that share the same information, or that are similar in nature. Structure applications in function groups of limited size. As a rule of thumb, strive for function groups of a size where there is no need to scroll to view other parts of the group. EXAMPLE For a wheel loader application, the choice of function groups on a top level could be: • Joystick functions, with all the controls for the hydraulic implements. • Engine, with J1939 interface, including engine speed command. • Transmission control, a separate group from the engine, but with function group interfaces to the engine. • Machine diagnostics, with a collection of diagnostics that do not influence the machine operation, e.g. hour counters. Layout Organize functions with inputs to the left and outputs to the right. This will aid the readability of the application by giving a graphical illustration of the control flow. EXAMPLE Channel layout for a boom function. IQANdesign User manual 294 General guidelines 15 Coding guidelines Calculation order The application should not have any unintentional priority warnings. See section Calculation order on page 62. Red line if the calculation order is reversed. The effect of a reverse calculation order will in most cases be limited to a delay in the response time of that function, but for complex functions the calculation order can be used to change the functionality. When this is intentional, it should be well documented, and it may be wise to place that function in a small function group on its own to reduce the risk of unintentionally changing the calculation order with the Auto order function. IQANdesign User manual 295 General safety principles 15 Coding guidelines General safety principles For all functions that control hydraulic implements, the design principles in this section should be applied, as a minimum. These are actually general safety principles that are relevant for all machinery. For applications where there is an increased need for proving the integrity of the safety functions, also see section Safety related applications on page 299. Safety principles De-energization Error detection Error detection action Start and restart conditions One control station at a time Protect parameters Deactivate output if commanding input is open. Check status. Use safe error values. Consider safe start and restart conditions. Use states to avoid ambiguous input. Use limits and security. De-energization The use of De-energization is a general safety principle. Design the control function so that the output is deactivated if the commanding input is open. Error detection Use error detection by checking the status of channels used for control. Error detection action Design the application to enter a safe state if an error is detected. In IQAN, some error detection is automatic, and have an automatic response that sets the channel to its error value. Design the application with safe error values. EXAMPLES • For VIN that is reading the signal for a joystick function, a good error value is normally 0, since that normally corresponds to no activation. • Another example is a VIN that is reading the pressure in an overload detection function, a good error value here is to use a pressure that is higher or above the maximum possible pressure. Start and restart conditions Consider the safety of start-up and restart conditions. It is wise to design the application so that actuation of hydraulic implements always require a deliberate action from the operator. IQANdesign User manual 296 General safety principles 15 Coding guidelines EXAMPLE Start block functions. • For start-up, design a function that waits for the joysticks to return to the neutral position before allowing actuation of the hydraulic implements. • To avoid unexpected re-start after an error that could be intermittent, design a function that requires the joystick to return to neutral after an error is detected. Layout of a function with start-up check. The compare channels AAC, ADC and DDC can also be used in the implementation of safe start and restart conditions. Layout of a function with start-up check using AAC. One control station at a time In applications where hydraulic implements can be operated from different control stations, it is important that only one control station is active at a time. In IQANdesign, use states to avoid ambiguous inputs. IQANdesign User manual 297 If limits are not enough. where incorrect adjustments can cause an unwanted behavior.General safety principles 15 Coding guidelines EXAMPLE For a crane application where the functions can be operated both by joysticks in the cab or by a radio remote. such as voltage input calibration. There are two ways to avoid this for parameters that need to be adjustable: • Use limits on the parameters. User access levels gives a stronger protection than PIN codes. The use of limits should be the primary way of keeping the parameters within a safe range. IQANdesign User manual 298 . protect the adjust groups with an access level or PIN codes. Use of state machine channel. and are to be preferred for parameters that can influence safety. function parameters or current output min and max can have a significant impact on the machine functionality. • Protect the adjust groups from unauthorized access. or from the radio remote. two separate inputs are used to select either control from the cab. A state machine channel is used to select if local joystick control or radio remote is used. Protect parameters Modifying parameters. Safety related function groups Organize the application in function groups so that the safety functions are separated from normal functions. this needs special attention. To ensure that the safety function takes priority: • In analog channels.Safety related applications 15 Coding guidelines Safety related applications In addition to the guidelines above. use Blocking objects with the Or method. When the safety functions can not be completely separated from normal functions.g. Interfaces to non safety related functions The safety function shall always take priority over normal functions. Use compare channels. IDC. the module will fall back to using the application default values for the affected channel(s). Application defaults on parameters Design the application so that it is in a safe state when the application default is used for any parameter. In the unlikely event that adjustable. e. DMAC use Limiting objects with the MinOf (absolute) method. see section Safety related function groups on page 67. factory default or stored parameters are corrupted. further requirements apply for applications that use an IQAN module certified for functional safety.g. Use safe application defaults. Mark function groups containing safety functions as safety related. for example the IQAN-MC3. Requirements on safety related applications Safety related function groups Interfaces to non safety related functions Application defaults on parameters Input integrity Use safety related function groups where applicable. e. always use limits to keep it within the expected interval. To control the risk of an unexpected input from a normal function. Safety related functions shall take priority over non safety related (limiting). • In digital channels. IQANdesign User manual 299 . IQAN modules certified for functional safety are continuously monitoring the integrity of stored and adjustable parameters. For many input types. select an application default at or above the longest possible boom length. Use the compare channels AAC.Safety related applications 15 Coding guidelines EXAMPLE On an application with a safety function for load moment control. If the boom length is a function parameter that is configured in production for various machine models. this can only be done by comparing the signal with another redundant signal. the parameter(s) for overload are safety related. where the geometry of the machine influences the configuration of the overload protection. IQANdesign User manual 300 . for example those connecting to digital inputs. Input integrity The integrity of the input signals used in a safety function must be ensured. ADC and DDC to check if the inputs signals are OK. You can find the actual components used in these examples in the application file Examples.ida. IQANdesign User manual 301 .16 Examples This chapter contains a number of examples. which can be found in the Examples folder created by IQANdesign’s installation program. • Add a voltage input to your application by clicking VIN in the function group tool bar. Voltage input added. we need to connect this voltage input to a pin on a module. Enter the new name Temperature and press <Enter>. • Now. Channel renamed. Select Modules in the application manager. • Change the unit by clicking on the Unit property in the property inspector. • Start IQANdesign and create a new application by selecting File > New. Enter the new unit °C and press <Enter>. IQANdesign User manual 302 . The character ° can be inserted by typing 248 on your numeric key pad while holding the <Alt> key pressed. • Rename the voltage input by clicking on the Name property in the property inspector.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Present inputs on the master display In this example we will add a couple of inputs and present them on a display page. Voltage input connected to master module. A block diagram is shown. Point at the index next to your voltage input (A) to see connector and pin number. • Select Application in the application manager. Click the voltage input and drag it to MDL: Master in the application manager. Master module added.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Modules overview. Your voltage input has been connected to the first available pin. • Add a master module by clicking the MDL button in the modules tool bar. • Rename the master module by pressing <F2> (shortcut key for Rename). • Select MDL: Master in the application manager. enter Master and press <Enter>. IQANdesign User manual 303 . Right-click on IQANdesign User manual 304 . Drop the channel where you want it. Channel renamed. Add a second channel.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Connector 1. press <Enter>. we will add a display page and a couple of controls that will be used to display our voltage input and frequency input values. Then press <Tab> twice to move to property Unit. • Connect the frequency input to the master module in the same way as you did with the voltage input. • Rename frequency input by pressing <F2>. • To use another pin. • Select Application in the application manager. Click the FIN button in the function group tool bar and drag it to the work area. Move to property Scaled max and enter value 50. pin number 18. simply drag the channel and drop it on another index. • Now. enter km/h and press <Enter>. We’ll use a different method this time. enter Vehicle speed. Frequency input being dragged. a frequency input. Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Display pages in the application manager and select Add display page in the popup menu. • Move the value control to another position on the display page. Add display page. enter Main page and press <Enter>. See section Design tools on page 246 for other methods. The easiest is to drag and drop it where you want it. Add display page dialog. IQANdesign User manual 305 . • Add a value control by clicking Value in the display page tool bar. This can be done in several ways. • Rename the display page by pressing <F2>. • Select Main page in the application manager. • Select MDL page in the display page dialog that is displayed. Set property Show to Always to make this page visible. Go to the property Input channel in the property inspector. Go to property Font in the property inspector. • We want to use a larger font for this value. On property IQANdesign User manual 306 . Click on the drop down arrow to the right and select our voltage input in the popup menu. Voltage input selected. • We want to connect our voltage input to this value control. Click on the expand button to the left. • Rename it to Temperature value.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Value control added. IQANdesign User manual 307 . • Right-click on Dial images in the application manager and select Add image in the popup menu. On property Bold.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Size select Huge in its drop down list. Therefore we must start to add an image to our application. • For our frequency input we want to use a gauge to present its value. Find the image file light_speedometer_50kmh. Font property changed. The gauge control needs a background bitmap for its dial. Right-click on Images in the application manager and select Add image group in the popup menu.bmp in the Gauges folder and open it. double-click its value to change it to Yes. • Rename the image group to Dial images. • Navigate to the folder Image Library that has been installed on your computer. Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Open image dialog box. • Add a gauge control by clicking the drop down arrow on the IGauge button and select the dial image in the popup menu. IQANdesign User manual 308 . The image group view shows only thumbnails of its images. Image group view. • The image is added to your image group and automatically renamed to its file name without the suffix. • Go back to the display page Main page by selecting it in the application manager. • Set property Input channel to our frequency input Vehicle speed [km/h]. we want to save our application. This is not correct for this gauge.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Dial image selected. Enter all these properties. there is also a text file with all the property values you need to position the needle correctly. but first we should give it a name and a version. Select Application in the application manager. see image below. In the folder where you found the image. • The gauge needle is by default positioned in the center of the image. Image gauge properties. Change IQANdesign User manual 309 . • Now. • The simulator detects an error on our voltage input. The status bar of IQANdesign should now show Examples 1. Also click on the F2 button in the simulator window to close its error dialog box. Select folder and file name and click Save. IQANdesign User manual 310 .00. We can easily change the value of our voltage input by clicking on it and moving its slider control in IQANsimulate or IQANdesign. • To test our application we will use IQANsimulate. • Select File > Save. and that is detected as a short-circuit to ground for voltage inputs. • Play with the values on our voltage and frequency inputs and see how the displays controls react. IQANsimulate is started and the simulator window is shown. A save dialog box is shown. That is because the default value for all channels is 0.00.Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples property Name to Examples and property Version to 1. Simulator running. Status bar. Click the Run button in the main tool bar. • Stop your simulation by clicking the Stop button in the main tool bar. IQANdesign User manual 311 .Present inputs on the master display 16 Examples Simulator running. Add function group. boom and telescope. where 0% equals center position. Function groups are containers of channels. Add two Directional analog channels (DAC) with the names Lever Boom and Lever Telescope. • Now let’s add the channels we need for our crane. The editor should now be empty. The telescope will also have an end damping function. IQANdesign User manual 312 . • Double-click on the function group to open it. • Rename the function group to Crane. A normal application contains a lot of channels.Controlling a boom function 16 Examples Controlling a boom function In this example we will add a function group and some channels to control two hydraulic functions on a crane. They will let you organize and structure your application. You can also select the function group in the application manager under Application. • A function group is created. You can create as many function groups as you like and even have nested function groups. • Right-click in the Application editor and select Add Function Group. Its value is -100% to 100%. This is a pre-calibrated channel type for IQAN levers. Function group Crane. and having them all in the same view is not a good idea. change its Unit property to [%]. • Some of the channels are red. add a Dual direction math channel (DMAC) and rename it to Telescope function. which we will do later. You can also use the Check application function to get more details on all your application problems. • Also. It is typically used to control a valve. Problem description. It is used to perform mathematical calculations. This channel type can be found on the Calculation tab in the channel tool bar. see section Application check on page 17. Drag a lever module (Lx) and an expansion module (XA2) and drop them on CAN bus A. Also.Controlling a boom function 16 Examples • Add two Current output channels (COUT) with the names Boom and Telescope. Point your mouse to a channel to see a description of the problem. to prepare for our end damping function. • The editor should now look something like this: Boom and telescope channels. • To fix this. IQANdesign User manual 313 . which means the channel isn’t connected to any module. In our case it says Error: Unassigned. we need to add modules and assign our channels to them. This is a channel type to control current outputs on IQAN modules. Select Modules in the application manager. which means there is some problem with them. or calculation order. On the Telescope output we want to use Telescope function instead to control our output. Instead. This indicates a Priority. IQANdesign User manual 314 . All channels are calculated in a specific order each sample. • Go back to our Crane function group. Do the same with the current outputs. • Lines are now drawn between our channels to indicate how channels reference each other. The input value is converted to a current based on the channel calibration. It should range from -100% to 100%. The default order is the order they were added to the application. • Fix this problem by selecting Lever Boom as input channel on the Boom current output. see section Value on page 100. This means the reference property Input channel has not been defined. Select both lever channels by dragging a box around them.Controlling a boom function 16 Examples Drop XA2 module on CAN bus A. The input channel is used by the current output to control its value. This is because we want to do some calculations on the telescope lever and position inputs before passing the value to the output. Drag both channels and drop them on the Lx module in the application manager. problem. Select multiple channels by dragging a box around them. • None of the channels are red anymore. • The current outputs are still red. The problem description now says Error: Undefined reference. but drop them on the XA2 module. the line between Telescope function and Telescope is red. This means that Telescope will be calculated before Telescope function and thereby use Telescope function value from the previous sample. With a sample time of 50 ms. but probably not what we wanted. this means you will get a 50 ms delay here. Rename it to Telescope position. it is hidden from all other function groups. Not dangerous. which will try to order the channels for us so we get as few Priority problems as possible. The solution to this is to use a Function group input channel. To do this we need to know the telescope position of course. • To fix this. Set calculation order. Click OK. IQANdesign User manual 315 . If we put it in our Crane function group. • Change the order by drag and drop of the necessary channels. It is located on the Miscellaneous tab in the channel tool bar. • Now it’s time for the end damping function. right-click on the Telescope output and select Calculation order. • Add a Function group input channel to the Crane function group. Change property Unit to m (meters). Channels in a function group can only reference other channels within the same group. There is one problem though. A dialog box is shown.Controlling a boom function 16 Examples Remember that we added the current outputs before we added the math channel. the telescope position will be used in other function groups in our application later on. We want the telescope to slow down before it reaches any end position. The telescope position is measured with a position sensor connected to a voltage input on our XA2 module. In this case we can use the Auto order button. Change the Scaled max property to 2. Change property Unit to m (meters). Select Telescope position sensor at the Telescope position property. which is 2 meters. Limiting + and Limiting -. Input. The vector object is a linear function defined by two points. There is a red line from Telescope position sensor to Crane.Controlling a boom function 16 Examples • Go back to the Application editor and add a voltage input. Select the Lever Telescope channel as Input. Set properties as shown in picture: IQANdesign User manual 316 . • The function group input channel Telescope position will get the value and status of the Telescope position sensor voltage input. and one in the negative direction (in). one in the positive direction (out). Change the calculation order as before to fix this Priority problem. which you can see in the function inspector below the editor. • To use it in the Crane function group. This channel has a function. This object type has only one property. The voltage input can be used in other function groups in the same way. Rename it to Telescope position sensor. Select the math channel Telescope function. It will now have a new property. • The end damping is implemented as limiting objects. Since this is the only controlling object. that is. Right-click in the Controlling objects list box and select Add Single. Right-click in the Limiting + objects list box and select Add Vector. it will now control the value of the math channel. This is the name of your function group input that you added earlier. Controlling. select the function group. named Telescope position. The value of the object will always be the same as Input. A function consists of objects in different object groups. • Press F5 to refresh the view. the math channel will have the same value as the lever input. • Now we have everything we need to write our end damping function. • Drag it to the XA2 module and drop it to connect it to one of its pins. • Let’s start by adding the Controlling objects. A dual direction math channel has three object groups. Channel connected to a function group. This corresponds to our telescope’s maximum length. Controlling a boom function 16 Examples Vector object properties. and vice versa for the Limiting . For example. decrease linearly down to 20% when Input goes from 1. when the output value is greater than 0. never increase it.object group. that is. • The Limiting + object group will only be calculated when the output is controlling the positive direction. if the controlling object is 25% and the limiting object is 50% the channel value will still be only 25%. • The vector object’s value will be 100% for Input values up to 1.object group to get end damping in the other end position as well. Note that it will only limit the value. See property values below: Vector object properties in negative direction. Since this object was placed in the Limiting + object group that has higher priority than the Controlling object group it will limit the math channel’s value when we get close to outgoing end position.75 meters. • Add a vector object to the Limiting .75 to 2 meters and then stay at 20% for all Input values higher than 2 meters. The function group and function inspector should now look like this: IQANdesign User manual 317 . • Fix the last priority problem by changing the calculation order. go to Crane function group and select Telescope function in the Channel drop down box in the function inspector. • Start the simulator to test your application. IQANdesign User manual 318 . Limiting object decides the channel value. Change values on the telescope position and levers to see how they affect your current outputs. To measure the object values in the math channel.Controlling a boom function 16 Examples Crane function group and function inspector showing the telescope function. You can add all channels in that group in one operation by dragging the function group and drop it on the measure group. • Look at the measure group by selecting it in the application manager. Right-click on Measure groups in the application manager and select Add measure group. In this case we want to measure all channels in the function group Crane. • Start by adding a measure group. • Drag the channels you want measure and drop them on the Crane measure group in the application manager. Measure groups serve two purposes. Crane measure group. IQANdesign User manual 319 . • Rename the group to Crane. One is to measure channels graphically in IQANdesign and the other is to give the machine user access to measuring via the master display.Adding measure groups 16 Examples Adding measure groups It is now time to add some advanced measuring to our application. Adding measure groups 16 Examples • Each channel you added to the measure group has been encapsulated by a measure item. The Y axis will only show values for the selected measure item. • Test your measure group by starting the simulator. Select Measure > Start Measure to begin measuring. so you might want to give a more self-explanatory name in some cases. They were given the same name as its channel by default. you can use the cursors to get statistics on your data in the lower right corner of the measure group’s editor. After you have stopped measuring. • Each measure item has also been assigned a color and min/max values for the Y axis. The measure items are shown in the lower left corner. IQANdesign User manual 320 . Measured graph and statistics. Remember that this name will be visible to the machine user. but you can change it if you want to. Crane measure group in the MDL. Click on the menu button in the simulator to open the menu system. Select Crane in the list shown and click on the jog-shuttle to view its measure items. Click F2 to view measure groups.Adding measure groups 16 Examples • The measure group will also show up in the master display menu system. IQANdesign User manual 321 . Set property Timeout [ms] to 1500 ms to allow for some extra delay. This channel type will read and decode a J1939 CAN message. An excerpt from the SAE J1939 specification. add a Parameter group in (PGIN) channel. • A parameter group is identified by its parameter group number .PGN. We’ll add those later. let’s add some parameters to this parameter group. Enter that number in property PGN. A CAN message is called a parameter group in SAE J1939. An error will be generated for this channel if the message hasn’t been received within this time since the last one. • Add a function group with the name Diesel engine. • The specification states that engine temperatures should be sent once every second. • In that group.Diesel engine CAN communication 16 Examples Diesel engine CAN communication This example demonstrates how to communicate with a diesel engine via a CAN bus using the SAE J1939 protocol. • Now. Rename it to Engine temperatures. The PGN for engine temperatures is 65262 according to the specification. It is located on the CAN tab in the channel tool bar. IQANdesign User manual 322 . Each parameter group consists of one or more parameters. On property Parameters click the button to the right. Parameter 1.Diesel engine CAN communication 16 Examples Add a parameter property. asking you for a channel name. is added. click the button to the right to add the actual parameter channel. On property Channel. Enter Engine Coolant Temperature and click OK. New channel name. • A property. Add a parameter in channel. • A dialog box is shown. IQANdesign User manual 323 . Set properties from the specification. An excerpt from the SAE J1939 specification. IQANdesign User manual 324 . Fuel Temperature and Engine Oil Temperature in the same way as described above. Fuel temperature and Engine Oil Temperature in the SAE J1939 specification.Diesel engine CAN communication 16 Examples • A Parameter in channel is created and connected to the parameter group. It is positioned in the upper left corner of your function group by default. • It should look like this: Engine Coolant Temperature properties. Move it to a position next to your parameter group channel. • Enter the properties for Engine Coolant Temperature from the specification. • Add two more parameters to the parameter group. to set the offset of each parameter within the CAN frame. or click in the grid to position your parameter graphically. Set offset graphically.Diesel engine CAN communication 16 Examples • We have on more thing to do with the parameter group. IQANdesign User manual 325 . Click on the button to the right at property Offset [bits]. Enter the offset found in the specification for this parameter group. Start with parameter 1. • A dialog box is shown. The grid will show you which positions are available. Right-click on one of the parameter channels and select Function group output. Select the Buses tab in the modules tool bar. Go to Modules. The function group should now look like this: A blue arrow indicates function group outputs. • To be able to use these parameter values in other function groups we must make them function group outputs. Do the same for the other parameter channels. IQANdesign User manual 326 .Diesel engine CAN communication 16 Examples Parameter Engine Oil Temperature positioned at Byte 3. Drag a J1939 bus and drop it on the MDL. • Now we will add the diesel engine module to a CAN bus on the MDL. Its property Source address is by default set to 0 which is the specified address for engines. Other module types may have different addresses. • Drag the parameter group channel Engine temperatures and drop it on the Diesel engine module. Change this if the diesel engine requires IQAN to be another address. • You’re done! IQANdesign User manual 327 . • Add a J1939 module to the CAN bus we just added. • Rename the bus to Engine bus and set the Bus index property to B.Diesel engine CAN communication 16 Examples Drop the J1939 bus on the MDL. Rename it to Diesel engine. The Source address property is IQAN’s address on this bus and is by default set to 39. • Select the SMS out channel. • We want to send Vehicle speed and Engine Coolant Temperature in one text message to our service mobile phone when the engine temperature exceeds 100 °C. • Add another text property. • Add a Text parameter (TP) channel and name it Phone number. Set its Text property to “ and Engine temp [°C] = ”. • Add a phone number by clicking the button to the right on property Phone numbers. Select the text parameter Phone number as property Phone number 1. Set its Text property to “Speed [km/h] = ”. Enter the phone number to the service mobile phone in property Text. property OperIQANdesign User manual 328 . and Show property to Value. Set property Operator to >. You could also enter a valid phone number directly here but we strongly advice you to use a text parameter instead. • Click the button to the right on property Texts to add a text property. The advantage is that the text parameter can easily be changed later on. Set its Text property to channel Engine Coolant Temperature. • Add an SMS out (SMSOUT) channel and name it SMS out. • Add another text property. In the function inspector. add a Math object to the Activating object group. Text formatting channel properties. for example from the master display menu system. and Show property to Value. It is located on the Interface tab on the channel tool bar.Sending a text message 16 Examples Sending a text message This example will show you how to compose a text message and send it to a mobile phone using SMS (Short Message Service). Start with the message composition. • Add another text property. Set its Text property to channel Vehicle speed. Set name to Text msg. • Select text formatting channel Text msg as property Outgoing message on the SMS out channel. • Add a Text formatting channel (TFC). when the engine temperature exceeds 100 °C. • Now. IQANdesign User manual 329 . • The Application editor should now look something like this: SMS out function.Sending a text message 16 Examples and 1 to channel Engine Coolant Temperature and property Operand 2 to 100. Speed [km/h] = 23 and Engine temp [°C] = 101 Text message at receiving mobile phone. the SMS out channel will be activated and send its text message to the phone number specified by the phone number text parameter. the default state will become true. Only one state can be active at the same time. at least one selector switch is needed. either from the cabin or from a radio remote. • Left click on the state machine channel. start by adding the modules. • Left click on the state machine.Using states on a boom function 16 Examples Using states on a boom function In this example the difference between the state machine channel and the state parameter channel will be explained. Give the modules understandable names. To decide if the crane is controlled from the joystick in the cabin or from the radio control. it might be good to first have a look at the example “Controlling a boom function”. an IQAN-MDL. The channels are similar. IQANdesign User manual 330 . two digital inputs will be used to decide the active control. Change it to Error or disabled. • Right click on the same tab again and select Add State. Right click on the tab named New State and select Rename. • Select the state Cabin control in the function inspector. Each cycle the states are evaluated from left to right. and both of them can be used in channels and controls that have either the property function selector or mode selector. To follow this tutorial. an IQAN-Lx and a radio module. In the property inspector to the right a property called Default state name will appear. • Add two digital inputs. State machine To explain the SMC we will use an example of a crane that can be controlled from two places. If no other states are true. the first one to be true will become the active state. Assign them to the MDL. Right click in Activating and select Add Single. use the drop down box to change it from True to Sw Cabin control active. All states in state machine except the default state have activating and blocking objects just like internal digital channels. Give the new state the name Radio control. On the bottom panel the function inspector will appear. The difference is that the state machine channel (SMC) contains logic to select the active state. name them Sw Radio control active and Sw cabin control active. The state machine channel is found on the tab Miscellaneous in the application view. In the Property inspector. Name it Cabin control. • First. • Add a state machine channel to the application and name it Remote control state. while the state parameter channel (SP) is controlled as an adjust item or by another channel. To improve the safety of this function. Since the states Cabin control and Radio control are both blocked when the inputs are equal.. = True Sw Cabin. • Test the function in the simulator to verify that the state changes like the table below Input Sw Cabin. name it Boom function.. • Add a current out channel. Scale the input from -100% to 100%. Now we continue by adding the actual crane function. IQANdesign User manual 331 . • Add a voltage in channel.... = False Error or disabled Radio control Cabin control Error or disabled The state machine should look like this when finished. Now use Sw Radio control active as the activating and Sw Cabin control active as the blocking object. name it Boom and select Boom function at the property Input channel. • Select the state Radio control.. name it JS Right X and place it on the lever module.Using states on a boom function 16 Examples • Repeat this by making the channel Sw Radio control active the blocking object for this state. the default state Error or disabled will become the active state. • Add a directional analog channel. = False Sw Radio.. = True Sw Radio. name it Radio Right X and place it on the XR module. • Add a dual direction math channel.. we will need to make the both the current out and the state parameter channel adjustable. Add a few states by clicking on the + sign. Create a 10% dead band by changing the properties to 10 -> 0. JS Right X. 100 -> 100 and -10 -> 0.Using states on a boom function 16 Examples • Mark the channel Boom function. and use Radio Right X as the inputs for both. select the state machine Remote control state. This is useful when different machine operators want to have different settings on the crane. select a state parameter (SP) channel from the tab Miscellaneous and name it Driver mode. • Tabs with the same names as the states in the state machine will now appear in the function inspector. Add two vector objects. Under Controlling +/-. In the property inspector to the right there is a property called Function selector. • To the right in the application manager. Rename it to Crane. add a single object. From the drop down box. -100 -> -100. • In the application view. State parameter We will now continue to explain the state parameter channel by implementing multiple driver settings. there is a property called States. Use a state parameter as the mode selector for a current out channel. • Select the tab Radio control. IQANdesign User manual 332 . change the property Mode selector to the state parameter Driver mode. To make it possible for the operator to change settings and mode. • On the current out channel. • In the property inspector. • Test the function in the simulator to verify that the function works as expected. right click on Adjust groups and select Add Adjust Group. Select the tab Cabin control. It is also possible to copy settings between modes. the boom function and the boom output channels. copy the function by marking the two joystick input channels.Using states on a boom function 16 Examples • From the application view. IQANdesign User manual 333 . When you paste them you will then only have to change the names and place them on the correct module. To complete the rest of the crane. see chapter 9. drag and drop the channels Boom and Driver mode onto the new adjust group. Now it is possible to change settings on the current output. and have different settings in different states of the mode selector.